Can I plug a hard drive to the USB connector and play movies?

No. The unit does not have 1) hard disk reading software/hardware (those are complex and built into computer operating systems) nor, 2) a movie decoder built into it. It will play a few audio formats (MP3, AAC, M4A), however, from thumb drives, but it does NOT play ANY VIDEO from sources connected to its USB ports.

Will this unit allow pass-through of video through the HDMI with out turning the unit on?

Yes. There's a "Standby Through" mode (manual page 97) that will output video/audio through HDMI while the unit is in standby mode, but standby mode will use more power with that enabled than it would otherwise, and it can only be enabled if you disable HDMI Control.

Have 8 built in speakers. Can I connect all 8 to this receiver?

Yes you can, you can connect up to 9 speakers and 2 subwoofers. You can connect only 2 speakers for front, 1 speaker for center, 2 speakers for surround, 2 speakers for back surround/BI-AMP, and 2 speakers for zone 2, and lastly 2 speakers which have to be subwoofers on the subwoofer slot. Hope this helps!

I intend to use the 675 as a 5.1 type. Would there be any problems with that? I know the receiver seems to be aware of how it's being wired up.

Thats what I'm using it as 5.1. Once you set it up the receiver knows how many speakers are set up.

Yamaha RX-V675 7.2 Channel Network AV Receiver with Airplay User Manual

i!!:!

!!,?i

ii!_:i

i!:!,:i

i!::i::i

ii:!,il

g Preparationi:

Check that the iotlowing accesso_i:_s are supplied with the product.

L__qRemote control [] Batteries

(AAA, R03, UM-4)(x2)

:Z AM antenna L] FMiarltenna

Inserl _hebatleries _he right way round

[] YPAO microphone

CD-ROM [] S_fety Brochure

(Owner's Manual) ::

[3 Easy Setup Guide

The illustrationsol the main unitand :::_ I

, remote con:_ro1used]n 1hisguide are of the RX-V775 (U,S.A.

I mode,)_unlessotherwisespecified. :::i I

............................................ _:::i.......... ;........

The foltowing cables (not supplie_i are required to build the system described in this

document. :: ::[

"Speaker cables (depending on !_e number of speakers)

• HUM; cable (x2)

• Audio pin cable(xl) ::: ::!

,, Digital optical cable (xt) (not _ec(d:iredif you! TVsupporlsARC [Audio ReturnChannel])

: _i•!!

Placing speakers

Set up the speakers in the room using the following diagram as a reference.

For information on other speaker systems, refer to "Owner's Manual".

10° to ,/10° to 30°

10° to 30°_ "" _.'_:"71"0° to 30°

_30 (1 ft)

cm or more,

I_ Front speaker (L)

Front speaker (R)

Ii_ Center speaker

Surround speaker (L)

Surround speaker (R)

Surround back speaker (L)

Surround back speaker (R)

| Subwoofer

2 En

Connecting speakers/subwoofer

• Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm

speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit's

speaker impedance to "6 £_ MIN". For details, see "Setting the

speaker impedance" in "Owner's Manual".

• Use a subwoofer equipped with built-in amplifier.

• Before connecting the speakers, remove the unit's power cable

from the AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer.

• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch

each other or come into contact with the unit's metal areas. This

may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables

short circuit, "Check SP Wires" will appear on the front display

when the unit is turned on.

• The illustrations of the unit (rear) used in this section are of the

RX-V775.

Connect the front speakers (Ir_ll/ll_]l)

to the FRONT (@/®) terminals.

2 Connect the center speaker (IrdB) to the

CENTER terminal.

[] Connecting speaker cables

Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the

negative (-) terminals of the unit and the speaker, and the

other is for the positive (+) terminals. If the wires are

colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to

the negative and the other wire to the positive terminals.

(_) Remove approximately 10

mm (3/8") of insulation

from the ends of the

speaker cable and twist

the bare wires of the cable

firmly together.

(_) Loosen the speaker terminal.

(_) Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side

(upper right or bottom left) of the terminal.

(_) Tighten the terminal.

Using a banana plug

(U.S.A., Canada, China,

Australia and General

models only)

(_) Tighten the speaker

terminal.

(_) Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.

En 3

3 Connect the surround speakers

(m3_m/m_l'_l) to the SURROUND (Q/(_)

terminals.

4 Connect the subwoofer (l_17m) to the

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT (1) jack.

• Use a subwoofer equipped with built-in amplifier.

Connect the surround back speakers

(13J_Jl/_) to the SURROUND BACK (Q/(_)

terminals.

Audio pin cable

e 8

4 En

Connecting external devices

Audio out

(optical) HDMI in HDMI out

HDMI 1 jack

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(General model only)

AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack

To an AC wall

outlet

The unit (rear)

Turn on

The unit (front)

Before connecting the power cable (Genera_ mode_ on_y)

Make sure you set the switch position of

VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage.

Voltages are AC 110-120/220-240 V, 50/60 Hz.

Connect external devices to the unit.

(_) Connect a BD/DVD player to the unit with an HDMI

cable.

If the BD/DVD player is currently connected to the

TV directly with an HDMI cable, disconnect the

cable from the TV and connect it to this unit.

(_) Connect a TV to the unit with the other HDMI cable.

(_) Connect a TV to the unit with a digital optical cable.

This connection is required to play back TV audio

on the unit. This connection is not required if your

TV supports ARC (Audio Return Channel).

(_) Connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet.

• For information on how to connect radio antennas or other

external devices, see "PREPARATIONS" in 'Owner's Manual".

2 Turn on the unit, the TV and the BD/DVD

player.

3 Use the TV remote control to change the

TV input to video from the unit.

The connections are complete. Proceed to the next

page to optimize the speaker settings.

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can

configure the unit's settings with the menu displayed on the TV. In

addition, you can select the on-screen menu language from English

(default), Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and

Chinese. For details, refer to "Owner's Manual". In this guide,

illustrations of English menu screens are used as examples.

E, 5

Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker connections, measures the

distances from them to your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as

volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room.

• During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that the test

tones do not frighten small children. Also, refrain from using this function at night when it

may be a nuisance to others.

• During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume.

• During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible.

• Do not connect headphones.

• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the measurement

process (about 3 minutes).

• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.

Preparing for YPAO

Turn on the subwoofer and set

the volume to half. If the

cross-over frequency is

adjustable, set it to maximum.

CROSSOVER/

HIGH OUTVOLUME

m s

The unit (front)

;ii:iiiii iiiii

liiiii! ii,...............................il;iii!i

Ear height

Place the YPAO microphone at your

listening position (same height as your

ears). We recommend the use of a

tripod as a microphone stand. You can

use the tripod screws to fix the

microphone in place.

Cursorkeys

ENTER

RETURN

Connect the YPAO microphone to the

YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.

The following screen appears on the TV.

• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone

before starting the measurement.

To start the measurement, use the cursor

keys to select "Measure" and press

ENTER.

The measurement will start in 10 seconds.

The following screen appears on the TV when

the measurement finishes.

• Ifthe cursor keys do not work, press RECEIVER and then use

the cursor keys.

• If any error message (such as E-1 ) or warning message (such

as W-2) appears, see "Error messages" or "Warning

messages" in "Owner's Manual".

• Ifthe warning message "W-1 :Out of Phase" appears, see

"If "W-1 :Out of Phase" appears" (next page).

6 En

3 Use the cursor keys to select

"Save/Cancel" and press ENTER.

Follow the procedure below to check the speaker

connections.

4 Use the cursor keys to select "SAVE" and

press ENTER.

S Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the

unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be

placedanywherewhere itcould beexposedto directsunlightor

hightemperatures(such as ontop of AVequipment).

(_) Use the cursor keys to select "Result" and press ENTER.

(_) Use the cursor keys to select "Wiring".

(_) Check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker that

was identified as being "Reverse" in the warning

message.

If the speaker is eenneeted eerreetly:

Depending on the type of speakers or room

environment, this message may appear even if the

speakers are connected correctly.

In this case, you can ignore the message.

Press RETURN and proceed to step 3.

If the speaker is eennected incerrectly:

Turn off the unit, reconnect the speaker cable, and then

try YPAO measurement again.

En 7

Playing back a BD/DVD

Now let's play back a BD/DVD.

We recommend playing back multichannel audio

(5.1-channel or more) to feel surround sound produced

by the unit.

Press HDMI 1 to select "HDMI 1" as the

input source.

HDMI 1

2 Start playback on the BD/DVD player.

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select

"STRAIGHT".

Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.

STRAIGHT

This completes the basic setup procedure.

Sound is only being output from the front speakers

during multichannel audio playback

Check the digital audio output setting on the BD/DVD

player.

It may be set to 2-channel output (such as PCM).

No sound is coming from a specific speaker

See "Troubleshooting" in "Owner's Manual".

Many more features!

The unit has various other functions.

Please refer to "Owner's Manual" on the supplied

CD-ROM to help you get the most out of the unit.

Connecting other playback

devices

Connect audio devices (such as CD player),

game consoles, camcorders, and many others.

Selecting the sound mode

Select the desired sound program (CINEMA

DSP) or surround decoder suitable for movies,

music, games, sports programs, and other uses.

Playing back from iPod

By using a USB cable supplied with iPod, you

can enjoy iPod music on the unit.

B Listening to FM/AM radio

[] Playing back music stored on

a USB storage device

B Playing back the network

contents

B Selecting the input source and

favorite settings at once

For more information, see "What you can do

with the unit".

YAMAHA COP, POI?,ATION

AV Receiver

RX-V67B

Owner's Manual

Read the supplied booklet "Safety Brochure" before using the unit.

English

CONTENTS

Accessories ...................................................... 5

FEATURES 6

What you can do with the unit .................................... 6

Part names and functions ........................................ 8

Front panel (RX-V775) .............................................................................. 8

Front panel (RX-V675) .............................................................................. g

Front display (indicators) .......................................................................... 10

Rear panel (RX-V775) .............................................................................. 11

Rear panel (RX-V675) .............................................................................. 12

Remote control ................................................................................... 13

PREPARATIONS 14

General setup procedure ........................................ 14

1 Placing speakers .............................................. 15

2 Connecting speakers .......................................... 19

Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections ....................................... 21

Input/outputjacks and cables ................................... 22

3 Connecting a TV ............................................... 23

4 Connecting playback devices .................................. 28

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) ............................................... 28

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) ..................................................... 31

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel ......................................................... 31

5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas ............................... 32

6 Connecting to a network ....................................... 33

7 Connecting other devices ...................................... 34

Connecting an external power amplifier ........................................................... 34

Connecting recording devices ..................................................................... 34

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function .......................................... 35

8 Connecting the power cable ................................... 35

9 Selecting an on-screen menu language ......................... 36

10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) ......... 37

Measuring at one listening position (single measure) ............................................... 39

Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) (RX-V775 only) ........................... 40

Checking the measurement results ................................................................ 41

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments ......................................................... 42

Error messages .................................................................................... 43

Warning messages ................................................................................ 44

PLAYBACK 45

Basic playback procedure ....................................... 45

Selecting an H DMI output jack (RX-V775 only) ...................................................... 45

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch

(SCENE) ........................................................ 46

Configuring scene assignments .................................................................... 46

Selecting the sound mode ....................................... 47

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) ............................................... 48

Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) ....................................... 48

Enjoying unprocessed playback ................................................................... 51

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) ..................................................... 52

Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) ................... 52

Listening to FM/AM radio ....................................... 53

Setting the frequency steps ........................................................................ 53

Selecting a frequency for reception ................................................................ 53

Registering favorite radio stations (presets) ........................................................ 54

En 2

Radio Data System tuning ......................................................................... 55

Operating the radio on the TV ..................................................................... 56

Playing back iPod music ......................................... 58

Connecting an iPod ............................................................................... 58

Playback of iPod content .......................................................................... 59

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device ............... 62

Connecting a USB storage device .................................................................. 62

Playback of USB storage device contents .......................................................... 62

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) ............ 65

Media sharing setup .............................................................................. 65

Playback of PC music contents .................................................................... 65

Listening to Internet radio ....................................... 68

Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) ........... 70

Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents ........................................................... 70

Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) ................ 72

Preparing Zone2 .................................................................................. 72

Controlling Zone2 ................................................................................ 75

Viewing the current status ...................................... 77

Switching information on the front display ........................................................ 77

Viewing the status information on theTV .......................................................... 77

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources

(Option menu) .................................................. 78

Option menu items ............................................................................... 78

CONFIGURATIONS 81

Configuring input sources (Input menu) .......................... 81

Input menu items ................................................................................. 81

Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) .................... 83

Scene menu items ................................................................................ 84

Configuring sound programs/surround decoders

(Sound Program menu) ......................................... 85

Sound Program menu items ....................................................................... 86

Configuring various functions (Setup menu) ...................... 88

Setup menu items ................................................................................. 89

Speaker (Manual Setup) ........................................................................... 91

Sound ............................................................................................ 94

Video ............................................................................................. 95

HDMI ............................................................................................. 96

Network .......................................................................................... 98

Multi Zone ........................................................................................ 99

Function ......................................................................................... 100

ECO .............................................................................................. 102

Language ........................................................................................ 103

Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) ......... 103

Types of information ............................................................................. 104

Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) ...... 105

ADVANCED SETUP menu items ................................................................... 105

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) ................................................ 105

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) ...................................................... 105

Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU) ............................................... 106

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) ..................................................... 106

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MON.CHK) ....................................... 106

Restoring the default settings (INIT) ............................................................... 106

Updating the firmware (UPDATE) ................................................................. 107

Checking the firmware version (VERSION) ......................................................... 107

Controlling external devices with the remote control ............ 108

Registering the remote control code for a TV ...................................................... 108

Registering the remote control codes for playback devices ........................................ 109

Programming from other remote controls (learning) .............................................. 110

Clearing functions learned from other remote controls ............................................ 111

Resetting remote control codes ................................................................... 112

Updating the unit's firmware via the network ................... 113

E. 3

APPENDIX 114

Frequently asked questions .................................... 114

Troubleshooting ............................................... 115

Power, system and remote control ................................................................ 115

Audio ............................................................................................ 117

Video ............................................................................................ 118

FM/AM radio ..................................................................................... 119

USB and network ................................................................................ 120

Error indications on the front display ............................ 121

Ideal speaker layout ........................................... 122

Glossary ....................................................... 123

Audio information ............................................................................... 123

HDMI and video information ..................................................................... 124

Yamaha technologies ............................................................................ 125

Video signal flow ................................................................................. 126

Information on HDMI .......................................... 127

HDMI Control .................................................................................... 127

HDMI signal compatibility ........................................................................ 128

Trademarks ................................................... 129

Specifications ................................................. 130

Index ......................................................... 134

En 4

Accessories

Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.

[] Remote control

[] Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)

[] AM antenna

[] YPAO microphone

Insert the batteries the right

way round.

[] FM antenna

*One of the above is supplied depending on the region of

purchase.

[] CD-ROM (Owner's Manual)

Operathg rar*}ge of the r_mete cor'_t_o_

• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range

shown below.

(RX-V775) (RX-V675)

!Within

16 m (20 ft)

• The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the RX-V775 (U.S.A.

model), unless otherwise specified.

[] Easy Setup Guide [] Safety Brochure

• Some features are not available in certain regions.

• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.

• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.

• This manual describes all the "iPod", "iPhone" and "iPad" as the "iPod". "iPod" refers to "iPod", "iPhone"

and "iPad", unless otherwise specified.

• _ indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.

• _ indicates supplementary explanations for better

use.

Accessories En 5

FEATURES

Wide variety of supported content

• iPod/iPhone/iPad _ Ip_58

• USB _ ipo62

• Media server (PC/NAS) _ 111_o65

• Internet radio _ Ipo68

• AirPlay _ pJO

Network contents

iPod/iPhone/iPad

USB device

HDMI Control

_........ _........ Audio/V ide o

BD/DVD player

@N@@

Control _

.... Audio]Video

..... (via NDMI/MHL)

Smartphone/Tablet

settings to suit your room (YPAO)

• Reproducing stereo or multichannel _ Ip48

sounds with the sound fields like

actual movie theaters and concert halls

[_ (CINEMA DSP)

• Enjoying compressed music with _ IIi_52

enhanced sound (Compressed Music

Enhancer)

• Playing back music in multiple rooms _ 111_o'72

(multi-zone)

Speakers

Audio

Audio/Video

AV receiver (the unit)

FEATURES • Whatyou can do with the unit En 6

Full of useful functions! Useful tips

rl Connecting various devices (p.28)

A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks

on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as

BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),

game consoles, camcorders, and other devices.

rl Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.48)

Connecting presence speakers allows you to create a

natural 3-dimensional sound field in your own room

(CINEMA DSP 3D). Even when no presence speakers

are connected, the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)

function produces 3D surround sound.

rl Playing backTV audio in surround sound

with a single HDMI cable connection

(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.23)

When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one

HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio

input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control

signals.

HDMI Control

TV audio

Video from

m external device

rl Easy operation and wireless music

playback from iPhone or Android device

By using the application for smartphone/tablet "AV

CONTROLLER", you can control the unit from an

iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices. Visit our

website for details.

rl Listening to FM/AM radio (p.53)

The unit is equipped with a built-in FM/AM tuner. You

can register up to 40 favorite radio stations as presets.

rl Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (p.52)

When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays

back the selected source with the least circuitry, which

lets you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.

rl Easy operation with a TV screen

You can navigate through different types of content

(such as iPod, USB, and network), view information, or

easily configure the settings using the on-screen menu.

rl Low power consumption

The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the

unit's power consumption (p.102).

The combination of video/audio input jacks does not

match an external device...

Use "Audio In" in the "Input" menu to change the

combination of video/audio input jacks so that it matches

the output jack(s) of your external device (p.29).

Video and audio are not synchronized...

Use "Lipsync" in the "Setup" menu to adjust the delay

between video and audio output (p.94).

I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...

Use "Audio Output" in the "Setup" menu to select the

output destination of signals input into the unit (p.97).

Your TV speakers may be selected as an output

destination.

I want to use the supplied remote control to operate

external devices...

devices (such as a TV and BD/DVD players) (p. 108).

I want to change the on-screen menu language...

Use "Language" in the "Setup" menu to select a

language from English, Japanese, French, German,

Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.36).

I want to update the firmware...

Use "UPDATE" in the "ADVANCED SETUP" menu to

update the unit's firmware (p.107). If the unit is

connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed

on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.113).

Many other settings are available that let you to

customize the unit. For details, see the following pages.

• Input settings (p.81)

• SCENE settings (p.84)

• Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.86)

• Various function settings (p.89)

• Information view (such as audio signal and video

signal) (p.104)

• System settings (p. 105)

FEATURES • Whatyou can do with the unit En 7

Front panel (RX-V775)

@ MAIN ZONE @ key

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

@ Standby indicator

Lights up when tile unit is in standby mode under any of tile

following conditions.

• HDMI Control is enabled (p.96)

• Standby Through is enabled (p.97)

• Network Standby is enabled (p.98)

• An iPod is being charged (p.58)

@ ZONE 2 key

Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.75).

@ ZONE CONTROL key

Changes the zone (main zone or the Zone2) that is controlled

by the keys and knobs on the front panel (p.75).

@ INFO key

Selects tile information displayed on tile front display (p.77).

@ MEMORY key

Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.54).

@ PRESET keys

Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.54).

@ FM and AM keys

Switch between FM and AM (p.53).

@ Front display

Displays information (p.10).

@ Remote control sensor

Receives remote control signals (p.5).

@ TUNING keys

Select tile radio frequency (p.53).

@ PURE DIRECT key

Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.52).

@ INPUT knob

Selects an input source.

@ PHONES jack

For connecting headphones.

@ YPAO MIC jack

For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.37).

@ TONE CONTROL key

Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range

of output sounds (p.79).

@ SCENE keys

Select tile registered input source, sound program, and

various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when

it is in standby mode (p.46).

@ PROGRAM keys

Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.47).

@ STRAIGHT key

Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.51).

@ VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack

For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game

console (p.31) or a smartphone (p.32).

@ USB jack

For connecting a USB storage device (p.62) or an iPod

(p,SS).

VIDEO jack

For inputting video when "USB" is selected as the input

source (p.58).

@ VOLUME knob

Adjusts the volume.

FEATURES • Part names and functions En 8

Front panel (RX-V675)

@ MAIN ZONE O key

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

@ Standby indicator

Lights up when tile unit is in standby mode under any of tile

following conditions.

• HDMI Control is enabled (p.96)

• Standby Through is enabled (p.97)

• Network Standby is enabled (p.98)

• An iPod is being charged (p.58)

@ YPAO MIC jack

For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.37).

@ ZONE 2 key

Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.75).

@ Remote control sensor

Receives remote control signals (p.5).

@ ZONE CONTROL key

Changes the zone (main zone or the Zone2) that is controlled

by the keys and knobs on the front panel (p.75).

@ INFO key

Selects tile information displayed on tile front display (p.77).

@ MEMORY key

Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.54).

@ PRESET keys

Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.54).

@ FM and AM keys

Switch between FM and AM (p.53).

@ Front display

Displays information (p.10).

@ TUNING keys

Select tile radio frequency (p.53).

@ PURE DIRECT key

Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.52).

@ PHONES jack

For connecting headphones.

@ INPUT keys

Select an input source.

@ TONE CONTROL key

Adjusts tile high-frequency range and low-frequency range

of output sounds (p.79).

@ SCENE keys

Select tile registered input source, sound program, and

various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when

it is in standby mode (p.46).

@ PROGRAM keys

Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.47).

@ STRAIGHT key

Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.51).

@ VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack

For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game

console (p.31) or a smartphone (p.32).

@ USB jack

For connecting a USB storage device (p.62) or an iPod

(p,58).

VIDEO jack

For inputting video when "USB" is selected as the input

source (p.58).

@ VOLUME knob

Adjusts the volume.

FEATURES • Part names and functions En 9

Front display (indicators)

@ HDMI

Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.

OUTI/OUT2 (RX-V775 only)

Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI

signal

OUT (RX-V675 only)

Lights up when HDMI signals are being output.

@ CINEMA DSP

Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.48) is working.

CINEMA DSP "-_

Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.48) is working.

@ ENHANCER

Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.52) is

working.

@ ADAPTIVE DRC

Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.79) is working.

@ STEREO

Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.

TUNED

Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station

signal.

@ PARTY (RX-V775 only)

Lights up when tile unit is in the party mode. (p.76)

@ SLEEP

Lights up when tile sleep timer is on.

@ ZONE2

Lights up when audio output to Zone2 is enabled (p.75).

@ MUTE

Blinks when audio is muted.

@ Volume indicator

Indicates tile current volume.

@ Cursor indicators

Indicate tile remote control cursor keys currently operational.

@ Information display

Displays tile current status (such as input name and sound

mode name). You can switch the information by pressing

INFO (p.77).

@ Speaker indicators

Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.

Front speaker (L)

Front speaker (R)

Center speaker

Surround speaker (L)

Surround speaker (R)

Surround back speaker (L)

Surround back speaker (R)

Surround back speaker

Presence speaker (L)

Presence speaker (R)

Subwoofer

FEATURES • Part names and functions En 10

Rear panel (RX-V775)

(U.S.A. model)

* The area around the video/audio output jacks is

marked in white on the actual product to

prevent improper connections.

@ REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that

allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another

room (p.74).

@ TRIGGER OUT jack

For connecting to a device that supports the trigger function

(p.35).

@ DC OUT jack

For connecting to an optional accessory.

@ NETWORK jack

For connecting to a network (p.33).

@ ANTENNA jacks

For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.32).

@ HDMI OUT 1-2 jacks

For connecting to HDMI-compatible TVs and outputting

video/audio signals (p.23). When using ARC, TV audio signal

can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

@ MONITOR OUT jacks

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

For connecting to a TV that supports component video and

outputting video signals (p.27).

VIDEO jack

For connecting to a TV that supports composite video and

outputting video signals (p.27).

@ HDMI 1-5 jacks

For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and

inputting video/audio signals (p.28).

@ SPEAKERS terminals

For connecting to speakers (p.19).

@ VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(General model only)

Selects the switch position according to your local voltage

(p,35),

@ Power cable

For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.35).

@ PHONO jacks

(Except for U.S.A. and Canada models)

For connecting to a turntable (p.31).

® AUDIO 1-2 jacks

For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting

audio signals (p.31).

@ AV 1-6 jacks

For connecting to video/audio playback devices and

inputting video/audio signals (p.28).

@ AV OUT jacks

For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a

VCR) (p.34).

@ ZONE2 OUT jacks

For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and

for outputting audio (p.73).

@ PRE OUT jacks

For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier or to an

external power amplifier (p.34).

FEATURES • Part names and functions En 1 1

Rear panel (RX-V675)

(U.S.A. model)

* The area around the video/audio output jacks is

marked in white on the actual product to prevent

improper connections.

@ REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that

allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another

room (p.74).

@ TRIGGER OUT jack

For connecting to a device that supports the trigger function

(p.35).

@ DC OUT jack

For connecting to an optional accessory.

@ NETWORK jack

For connecting to a network (p.33).

@ HDMI OUT jack

For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting

video/audio signals (p.23). When using ARC, TV audio signal

can also be input through the HDMI OUT jack.

@ ANTENNA jacks

For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.32).

@ HDMI 1-5 jacks

For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and

inputting video/audio signals (p.28).

@ SPEAKERS terminals

For connecting to speakers (p.19).

@ VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(General model only)

Selects the switch position according to your local voltage

(p,35),

@ Power cable

For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.35).

@ AUDIO 1-2 jacks

For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting

audio signals (p.31).

@ AV 1-6 jacks

For connecting to video/audio playback devices and

inputting video/audio signals (p.28).

@ AV OUT jacks

For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a

VCR) (p.34).

@ ZONE2 OUT jacks

For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and

for outputting audio (p.73).

@ MONITOR OUT jacks

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

For connecting to a TV that supports component video and

outputting video signals (p.27).

VIDEO jack

For connecting to a TV that supports composite video and

outputting video signals (p.27).

@ SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1-2 jacks

For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.34).

FEATURES • Part names and functions En 12

Remote control

] @

iiiiiiii! _ii _ii ii_ ii ZIL ii_i i

@YAMAHA

(RX-V775 U.S.A.model)

@ Remote control signal transmitter

Transmits infrared signals.

@ SOURCE @ key

Turns on/off an external device.

SOURCE key

Sets the remote control to operate external devices (p.109).

This key lights up in green after pressed.

RECEIVER key

Sets the remote control to operate the unit (p.109). This key

lights up in orange after pressed.

RECEIVER @ key

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

@ Input selection keys

Select an input source for playback.

HDMI 1-5 HDMI 1-5 jacks

V-AUX VIDEO AUX jack (on the front panel)

AV 1-6 AV 1-6 jacks

AUDIO 1-2 AUDIO 1-2 jacks

TUNER FM/AM radio

USB USB jack (on the front panel)

NET NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a

desired network source)

-k (RX-V675, RX-V775 [U.S.A. and Canada models])

Changes the external device to be controlled

without switching the input source.

PHONO (RX-V775 [except for U.S.A. and Canada models])

PHONO jacks

@ MAIN/ZONE2 switch

Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by

the remote control (p.75).

@ SCENE keys

Select the registered input source, sound program, and

various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when

it is in standby mode (p.46).

@ PROGRAM keys

Select a sound program (p.47).

@ External device operation keys

Select menus for external devices (p.109).

@ ON SCREEN key

Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.

@ Menu operation keys

Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.

ENTER Confirms a selected item.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

@ MODE key

Switches the iPod operation modes (p.60).

@ Radio keys

Operate tile FM/AM radio when "TUNER" is selected as tile

input source (p.53).

BAND Switches between FM and AM radio.

PRESET Select a preset station.

TUNING Select the radio frequency.

External device operation keys

Let you play back and perform other operations for external

devices when an input source other than "TUNER" is

selected (p.109).

@ Sound mode keys

Select a sound mode (p.47).

® INFO key

Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.77).

@ SLEEP key

Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a

specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press

repeatedly to set tile time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off).

@ Numeric keys

Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.

MEMORY key

Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets (p.54).

@ TV operation keys

Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV

operations (p.108).

@ HDMI OUT key (RX-V775 only)

Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output

(p.45).

@ PARTY key (RX-V775 only)

Turns on/off tile party mode (p.76).

@ VOLUME keys

Adjust tile volume.

@ MUTE key

Mutes the audio output.

@ OPTION key

Displays tile option menu (p.78).

@ DISPLAY key

Displays status information on tile TV (p.77).

@ CODE SET key

Registers remote control codes of external devices on the

remote control (p. 108).

• To operate external devices with the remote control, register a

remote control code for each device before using (p,108),

FEATURES • Part names and functions En 13

PREPARATIONS

Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place them in your room.

Connect the speakers to the unit.

Connect a TV to the unit.

Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit.

Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.

Connect the unit to a network.

Connect external devices, such as an external power amplifier (RX-V775 only) and recording devices.

After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.

Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English).

Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room

(YPAO).

This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!

PREPARATIONS • General setup procedure En 14

_Speaker placement __@_

Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place the speakers and subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) in your room. This section describes the

representative speaker layout examples.

C_utio_'_

• Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unWs speaker impedance to "6 -Q MIN". In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

For details, see "Setting the speaker impedance" (p.18).

Front (L)

Front (R)

Center

Surround (L)

Surround (R)

Surround back (L)

Surround back (R)

Surround back

Presence (L)

Presence (R)

Subwoofer

Produce front right/left channel sounds (stereo sounds).

Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue and vocals).

Produce surround right/left channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce surround back channel

sounds when no surround back speakers are connected.

Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.

Produces sounds mixed from surround back left/right channel sounds.

Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA DSP 3D (p.48), the presence speakers

create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your room.

Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces the bass parts of other channels.

This channel is counted as "0.1 ". You can connect 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.

• • • • • • • •

• • • • • • •

• • • • • •

• •

• • •

• • • • • • • • •

• For information on the ideal speaker layout, see "Ideal speaker layout" (p.122).

• If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers or presence speakers.

To reinforce the rear right/left sounds, use them as surround back speakers.

To create a natural 3-dimensional sound field, use them as presence speakers.

• Two subwoofers connected to the unit output the same sounds.

PREPARATIONS • Placing speakers En 15

_Speakerplacement __@_

7.1 +2-channel system 7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers)

• The surround back speakers and presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit

automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the selected CINEMA DSP (p.48).

7.1-channel system (using presence speakers)

This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and

surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to

enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.

6.1-channel system

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural

• dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents.

This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and

surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to

enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speaker.

PREPARATIONS • Placing speakers En 16

_Speakerplacement __@_

5.1-channel system 4.1-channel system

This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and

surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying

5.1-channel contents.

a u

2.1-channel system

Front 5.1-channel system

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural

3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front

speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP).

Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround

speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound

(Virtual CINEMA DSP).

• Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system.

PREPARATIONS • Placing speakers En 17

_Speaker placement _@_@_@_

Setting the speaker impedance

Under itsdefault settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting

6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance to "6 _ MIN". In this case, you can also

use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall

outlet.

While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press

MAIN ZONE _.

MAIN ZONE d_

STRAIGHT

Check that "SP IMP." is displayed on the front display.

4 Press STRAIGHT to select "6 _ MIN".

Press MAIN ZONE _ to set the unit to standby mode and remove the

power cable from the AC wall outlet.

You are now ready to connect the speakers.

PREPARATIONS • Placing speakers En 18

Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.

The following diagrams provide connections for 7.1 +2-,

7.1-, and 6.1-channel systems as examples. For other

systems, connect speakers while referring to the

connection diagram for the 6.1-channel system.

Oa_tio_'_

• Remove the unit's power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn

off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers.

• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch

one another or come into contact with the unit's metal parts.

Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker

cables short circuit, "Check SP Wires" will appear on the front

display when the unit is turned on.

• The illustrations of the unit (rear) used in this section are of the

RX-V775.

Cables required for connection

(commercially available)

Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)

Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers)

,_ _._

7.1 +2-channel system

The unit (rear)

i ® ..... ©

ii ill

7.1-channel system

(using surround back speakers)

PREPARATIONS • Connecting speakers En 19

7.1-channel system

(using presence speakers)

The unit (rear)

6.1-channel system

@ Connecting speaker cables

Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting

the negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and

the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are

colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to

the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal.

(_) Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8") of insulation from

the ends of the speaker cable and twist the bare wires of

the cable firmly together.

(_) Loosen the speaker terminal.

(_) Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side

(upper right or bottom left) of the terminal.

(_) Tighten the terminal.

Using a banana plug

(U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only)

(_) Tighten the speaker terminal.

(_) Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.

When using only one surround back speaker, connect it

to the SINGLE jack (L side).

PREPARATIONS • Connecting speakers En 20

Push-typespeakerterminals

(RX-V675 only)

(_) Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8") of insulation from

the ends of the speaker cable, and twist the bare wires of

the cable firmly together.

(_) Press down the tab.

(_) Insert the bare wires of the cable into the hole in the

terminal.

(_) Release the tab.

I(_ L_'_$ "I_" +(red)

Connecting front speakers that

support bi-amp connections

When using front speakers that support bi-amp

connections, connect them to the FRONT jacks and

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP jacks.

To enable the bi-amp function, set "Power Amp Assign"

(p.91) in the "Setup" menu to "5ch BI-AMP" after

connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.

The unit (rear)

i ® ..... © ...... ® ........ © ® .............. ®

Caution

• Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or

cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the

instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not

making bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or

cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables.

• Surround back speakers cannot be used during bi-amp

connections.

Connecting the subwoofer

Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.

Audio pin cable

• The FRONT jacks and SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP/ZONE B jacks

output the same signals.

PREPARATIONS • Connecting speakers En 21

Video/audio jacks

C] HDMI jacks

Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single

jack. Use an HDMI cable.

HDMI cable

• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using

a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality

degradation.

• The unit's HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return

Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K video transmission features.

• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K videos.

C] HDMI/MHL jack

Transmits digital video and digital sound. Use an MHL

cable.

V,DEOAUX M HL cable

HOr_

M_L_w A

• The VIDEO AUX jack on the front panel of the unit supports both

HDMI and MHL connections. Use a cable that matches the jack on

your MHL-compatible mobile device. When connecting an

HDMI-compatible playback device to the VIDEO AUX jack, use an

HDMI cable. For details on an MHL connection, see "MHL

connection" (p.32).

Video jacks

C] COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

Transmit video signals separated into three

components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB),

and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video

cable with three plugs.

oRO

Component video cable

C] VIDEO jacks

Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.

Video pin cable

Audio jacks

[3 OPTICAL jacks

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical

cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before

using the cable.

Digital optical cable

[3 COAXIAL jacks

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial

cable.

Digital coaxial cable

[3 AUDIO jacks

Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin

cable (RCA cable).

Stereo pin cable

PREPARATIONS • Input/output jacks and cables En 22

Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.

You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.

The connection method varies depending on the functions and video input jacks

available on your TV.

Refer to the instruction manual of the TV and choose a connection method.

No _,

No =_

Yes

@ Connection Method 1 (p.23)

Yes

@ Connection Method 2 (p.25)

No ==

@ Connection Method 4 (p.27)

@ Connection Method 3 (p.26)

About HDMI Control

HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV

that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit's

power and volume with the TV's remote control. You can also control playback

devices (such as an HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player) connected to the

unit with an HDMI cable. For details, see "HDMI Control" (p.127).

About Audio Return Channel (ARC)

ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways under HDMI Control. If you connect a

TV that supports HDMI Control and ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you

can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.

Connection Method 1 (HDMI Control/ARC-compatible TV)

Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable.

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the "HDMI" parameters

(p.96) in the "Setup" menu.

• (RX-V775 only)

HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

• Use an HDMI cable that supports ARC.

The unit (rear)

HDMI OUT (ARC) jack

/ HDMI input

HDMI OUT

1 2 (ARC-compatible)

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV

(except some component video signals), regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the

unit. For details, see "Video signal flow" (p.126).

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and

network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.

• (RX-V775 only)

You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.27).

PREPARATIONS • Connecting a TV En 23

_] Necessary settings

To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the following settings.

For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.

After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices)

and the power cable to the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.

Configure the settings of the unit.

(_) Check that ARC is enabled on the TV.

(_) Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

(_) Press ON SCREEN.

ON SCREEN

ENTER

@ Use the cursor keys to select "Setup" and press ENTER.

3 Configure the settings for HDMI Control.

(_) Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI

Control-compatible BD/DVD player).

(_) Turn off the TV's main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.

(_) Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV's main power.

@ Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

(_) Check the following.

On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,

select the input source manually.

On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

_) Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or

adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

This completes the necessary settings.

If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be

automatically switched to "AV 4" and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.

If you cannot hear the TV's audio, check that "ARC" (p.97) in the "Setup" menu is set to

"On".

(_) Use the cursor keys (</:) to select "HDMI".

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)

the devices. It may solve the problem.

• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV's power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on

the TV.

If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set "ARC" (p.97) in the "Setup" menu to "Off" and use a digital

optical cable to input TV audio to the unit (p.25).

"AV 4" is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks,

use "TV Audio Input" (p.96) in the "Setup" menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the

SCENE function (p.46), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

_) Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select "HDMI Control" and press ENTER.

(_) Use the cursor keys to select "On".

® Press ON SCREEN.

PREPARATIONS • Connecting a TV En 24

Connection Method 2 (HDMI Control-compatible TV)

Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable.

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the "HDMI" parameters

(p.96) in the "Setup" menu.

• (RX-V775 only)

HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

HDMI OUT jack

The unit (rear)

Audio output

(digital optical)

_] Necessary settings

To use HDMI Control, you need to configure the following settings.

For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.

After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback

devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and

playback devices.

Configure the settings of the unit.

(_) Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

(_ Press ON SCREEN.

ON SCREEN

ENTER

(_) Use the cursor keys to select "Setup" and press ENTER.

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV

(except some component video signals), regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the

unit. For details, see "Video signal flow" (p.126).

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and

network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.

• (RX-V775 only)

You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.27).

@ Use the cursor keys (,/i) to select "HDMI".

(_) Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select "HDMI Control" and press ENTER.

_) Use the cursor keys to select "On".

(_) Press ON SCREEN.

PREPARATIONS • Connecting a TV En 25

Configure the settings for HDMI Control.

(_) Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as a HDMI

Control-compatible BD/DVD player).

(_ Turn off the TV's main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.

(_ Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.

@ Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

(_) Check the following.

On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,

select the input source manually.

On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

_) Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or

adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

This completes the necessary settings.

If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be

automatically switched to "AV 4" and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.

Connection Method 3 (TV with HDMI input jacks)

Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable.

The unit (rear)

If you switch the input source of the unit to "AV 4" using the AV 4 or SCENE(TV) keys,

the TV audio will be played back on the unit.

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)

the devices. It may solve the problem.

• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV's power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on

the TV.

• "AV 4" is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks or

if you want to use another input jack (other than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, use "TV Audio Input"

(p.96) in the "Setup" menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.46),

you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV

(except some component video signals), regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the

unit. For details, see "Video signal flow" (p.126).

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and

network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.

• If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other

than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, connect the TV to one of the AV 1-6 and AUDIO 1-2 jacks. To use

the SCENE function (p.46), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

• (RX-V775 only)

You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.27).

PREPARATIONS • Connecting a TV En 26

Connection Method 4 (TV without HDMI input jacks)

When connecting any video device to the AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the

unit, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks.

When connecting any video device to the AV 3-6 (VIDEO) jacks or the front VIDEO jack

of the unit, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack.

If you select "AV 4" as the input source by pressing AV 4 or SCENE(TV), the TV audio

will be played back on the unit.

• If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be

output to the TV.

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.

• If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other

than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, connect the TV to one of the AV 1-6 and AUDIO 1-2 jacks. To use

the SCENE function (p.46), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

rl COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable)

The unit (rear)

MONITOR OUT

(COMPONENT VIDEO)

jacks

Video input

(component video)

_COMPONENT

VEDEO

ii®

FI VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)

MONITOR OUT

The unit (rear) (VIDEO) jack

Video input

(composite video)

AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack

Audio output

(digital optical)

Connecting another TV or a projector

(RX-V775 only)

The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit

with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching

videos with the remote control (p.45).

HDMI OUT 2 jack

The unit

(rear)

EEE_

AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack

Audio output

(digital optical)

TV (already connected)

Projector

• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.

PREPARATIONS • Connecting a TV En 27

_D Playloackdevice connections __

The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow

you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect

an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.

- Connecting an iPod (p.58)

- Connecting a USB storage device (p.62)

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)

Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game

consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video

device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI

connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.

• If the combinationof video/audioinputjacks availableon the unitdoesnot matchyourvideodevice,change

its combinationaccordingto the outputjacks of your device(p.29).

HDMI connection

Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.

HDMI 1-5 jacks

The unit (rear)

Component video connection

Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable

(digital optical or digital coaxial). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on

the audio output jacks available on your video device.

Component video

Digital optical

Digital coaxial

AV 1 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)

AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)

The unit

AV 1-2

(COMPONENT VIDEO)

jacks

Video output

(component video)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI output

Video device

If you select the input source by pressing HDMI 1-5, the video/audio played back on

the video device will be output from the unit.

AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack or

AV 2 (COAXIAL) jack

Audio output

(digital optical or digital coaxial)

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1-2, the video/audio played back on the

video device will be output from the unit.

• The component video signals (other than 480i/576i signals) input to AV 1-2 jacks of the unit can be output

from the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks only. To watch those videos, you need to connect

your TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the unit (p.27).

• To watch videos input to the HDMI 1-5 jacks, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the

unit (p.23 to 26).

PREPARATIONS • Connecting playback devices En 28

__ Playback device connections __

Composite video connection

Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital

coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)

depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.

Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks

If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your

video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device. You

can connect a video device that has the following video/audio output jacks.

Digital coaxial AV 3 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Composite video Digital optical AV 4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo AV 5-6 (VIDEO + AUDIO)

Video output

(composite video)

Any of AV 3 (COAXIAL) jack, Audio output

AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack, (either digital optical,

AV 5-6 (AUDIO) jacks digital coaxial, or analog stereo)

If you select the input source by pressing AV 3-6, the video/audio played back on the

video device will be output from the unit.

Digital optical

Digital coaxial

Analog stereo

HDMI

AV 1 (OPTICAL)

AV 4 (OPTICAL)

AV 2-3 (COAXIAL)

AV 5-6 (AUDIO)

AUDIO 1-2

HDMI 1-5

AV 1-2

(COMPONENT

VIDEO)

Component video Analog stereo AV 5-6 (AUDIO)

AUDIO 1-2

rq Necessary setting

For example, if you have connected a video device to AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) and

AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks of the unit, change the combination setting as follows.

The unit (rear)

iiiiiiiiiiii

AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO)

jacks

Video output

(component video)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

Video device

• To watch videos input to the AV 3-6 (VIDEO) jacks, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack

(p.23 to 26) or to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack (p.27) of the unit.

AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks

Audio output

(analog stereo)

PREPARATIONS • Connecting playback devices En 29

• The following operation is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.

After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback

devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit.

Press AV 2 to select "AV 2" (video input jack to be used) as the input

source.

Use the cursor keys to select "Audio In" and press ENTER.

7 Use the cursor keys to select "AVS" (audio input jack to be used).

AV 2

_ON SCREEN

Cursorkeys

ENTER

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select "Input" and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (qf>) to select "AV2" (video input jack to be

used) and press the cursor key (A).

Press ON SCREEN.

This completes the necessary settings.

If you select "AV 2" as the input source by pressing AV 2, the video/audio played back

on the video device will be output from the unit.

PREPARATIONS • Connecting playback devices En 30

do..,co onno ,°ns@D@D@%

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)

Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit.

Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the

following connections.

AV 1 (OPTICAL)

Digital optical AV 4 (OPTICAL)

Digital coaxial AV 2-3 (COAXIAL)

AV 5-6 (AUDIO)

Analog stereo AUDIO 1-2

Turntable (PHONO) PHONO*

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel

Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit.

Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see

"Connecting an iPod" (p.58) or "Connecting a USB storage device" (p.62).

Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on

the unit.

_1 HDMI connection

Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the

unit with an HDMI cable.

* RX-V775 only (except for U.S.A. and Canada models)

Audio output

The unit AV 1-6 jacks (either digital optical,

(rear) AUDIO 1-2 jacks digital coaxial, or analog stereo)

Audio device

Turntable

Ground lead

PHONO jacks* Audio output (PHONO)

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1-6, AUDIO 1-2 or PHONO*, the audio

played back on the audio device will be output from the unit.

W_'_,_"_ com"_ecthg _:_tumtaMe

(RX-V775 only [except for U.S.A. and Canada models])

• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a

low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.

• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.

The unit (front)

Game console

Camcorder

If you select "V-AUX" as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played

back on the device will be output from the unit.

• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT

jack of the unit (p.23 to 26).

• You need to prepare an HDMI cable that match the output jacks on your device.

• When "USB" is selected as the input source, video signals input to the VIDEO jack are output from the

HDMI OUT and MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jacks.

PREPARATIONS • Connecting playback devices En 31

_1 MHL connection

Connect an MHL-compatible mobile device (such as smartphones) to the unit with an

MHL cable. You can enjoy full HD videos and multichannel audio sources stored on the

mobile device. The VIDEO AUX jack of the unit enables you to input videos and audio

directly from the mobile device to the unit.

The unit (front)

Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.

Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.

FM antenna

AM antenna

The unit (rear)

Mobile device

If you select "V-AUX" as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played

back on the mobile device will be output from the unit.

• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the

unit (p.23 to 26).

• You need to prepare an MHL cable that match the jack on your mobile device.

Assembling and connecting the AM antenna

• You can operate the mobile device using the menu operation keys, external device operation keys and

numeric keys on the remote control. However, some features may not be compatible, depending on the

mobile device or its application. In this case, operate the mobile device itself.

• If "Standby Through" (p.97) in the "Setup" menu is set to "On", you can output mobile device videos/audio

to the TV or operate the mobile device using the remote control of the unit even when the unit is in standby

mode.

• The unit supplies power to the mobile device in the following conditions.

- The unit is turned on.

- The unit is in standby mode while "Standby Through" (p.97) in the "Setup" menu is set to "On".

Hold down _ Insert _ Release

• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.

• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.

PREPARATIONS • Connecting the FM/AM antennas En 32

Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5

or higher straight cable).

You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and

Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.

Internet Network Attached Storage

(NAS)

• If you are using a router that supports DHCE you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit,

as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to

configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network

parameters manually (p.98).

• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in

"Network" (p.104) in the "Information" menu.

Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)

may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the

security software or firewall settings appropriately.

Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.

To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.

Mobile device

(such as iPod touch

and iPhone)

Network cable

The unit (rear)

PREPARATIONS • Connecting to a network En 33

Connecting an external power amplifier

(RX-V775 only)

When connecting an external power amplifier (pre-main amplifier) to enhance speaker

output, connect the input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit.

The same channel signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their

corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.

Oautior_

• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making

connections.

- Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them.

- When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS

terminals.

- When using an external amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, do not connect other

devices (except the unit) to the amplifier.

The unit (rear)

@ SUBWOOFER1-2 jacks

For connecting a subwoofer with built-in amplifier. When 2 subwoofers are connected, the same

sound is output from them.

@ CENTER jack

Outputs center channel sounds.

Connecting recording devices

You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT jacks. These jacks

output analog video/audio signals selected as the input.

• To copy video/audio from a video device, connect the video device to the AV 5-6 jacks of the unit.

• To copy audio from an audio device, connect the audio device to the AV 5-6 jacks or AUDIO 1-2 jacks of

the unit.

• Be sure to use the AV OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices.

Video/audio input

AV OUT jacks

@ FRONT jacks

Output front channel sounds.

@ SURROUND jacks

Output surround channel sounds.

@ SUR. BACK jacks

Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one external amplifier for the surround

back channel, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side).

Audio recording

device

Audio input

PREPARATIONS • Connecting other devices En 34

___Other connections DPower cable connection _

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function

The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the

unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that

supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the

trigger function by connecting the external device to the TRIGGER OUT jack.

;i!;i!;i!;i!;i!;i!;_!_;_i_!_!_!_i_i_i_i

!!!!i!!!i!i!!i_!i!_i!_i!_i!_i!_i!_i!_i!_!!!!!!!!!!i_!_____!__!__!_!!__!__!__!_i!_ii_i!_ii______

The unit (rear)

TRIGGER OUT jack

S stem

connection

input

®;@_®_-O_ Yamaha subwoofer that

supports a system connection

• You can configure the trigger function settings in "Trigger Output" (p.101 ) in the "Setup" menu.

Before connecting the power cable (General model only)

Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage.

Voltages are AC 110-120/220-240 V, 50/60 Hz.

• Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC

wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a

potential fire hazard.

The un!t (lea!! z VOLTAGE SELECTOR

.......v0_,_0__,_,_,o........

,I ....220V- o

........... .... U

After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.

The unit (rear)

To an AC wall outlet

PREPARATIONS • Connecting the power cable En 35

ON SCREEN

ENTER

Select the desired on-screen menu language from English

(default), Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and

Chinese.

Press RECEIVER @ to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select "Setup" and press

ENTER.

6 To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

7 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

• The information on the front display is provided in English only.

Use the cursor keys (q/_>) to select "Language" and

the cursor keys (A/V) to select the desired

language.

PREPARATIONS • Selecting an on-screen menu language Fn 36

The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function

detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to

your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the

speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic

parameters, to suit your room.

• The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)

technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically

designed for acoustic perfection.

• Please note the following when using YPAO.

- Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit.

- During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that

the test tones do not frighten small children. Also, refrain from using this function

at night when it may be a nuisance to others.

- During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume.

- During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible.

- Do not connect headphones.

Press RECEIVER _ to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switchthe TV input to display

video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If

the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to

maximum.

4 Place the YPAO microphone at your listening

position (same height as your ears) and connect it

to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.

YPAO MIC

jack The unit (front)

iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii

YPAO

microphone

.....Ear height

Place the YPAO microphone at

your listening position (same height

as your ears). We recommend the

use of a tripod as a microphone

stand. You can use the tripod

screws to stabilize the microphone.

• If you are using bi-amp connection or Zone2 speakers, set "Power Amp

Assign" (p.91) in the "Setup" menu to the appropriate setting before starting

YPAO.

PREPARATIONS • Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 37

ENTER

RETURN

The following screen appears on the TV.

(RX-V675)

(RX-V775)

(RX-V675)

This completes the preparations.

See "Measuring at one listening position (single measure)"

(p.39) to start the measurement.

(RX-V775)

Proceed to Step 5.

• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting

the measurement.

• To configure the power amplifier assignment setting, press RETURN and

select "Manual Setup" (p.91).

5 (RX-V775 only) If desired, change the measuring

method (multi/single).

(_ Use the cursor keys to select "Multi Position" and press ENTER.

(_ Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.

Settings

Yes

No (default)

Select this option if you will have several listening

positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound.

You can take measurements at up to 8 different

positions in the room. The speaker settings will be

optimized to suit the area defined by those positions

(multi measure).

Select this option if your listening position will always be

fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The

speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position

(single measure).

• If the cursor keys do not work, the remote control may be set to operate external

devices. In this case, press RECEIVER and then use the cursor keys.

• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to

enjoy surround sound in a wider space.

• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening

position you will be seated most frequently.

PREPARATIONS • Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 38

ENTER

RETURN

Multi measure

Single measure (5 listening positions)

Multi measure Multi measure

(1 listening position + front/back/left/right) (2 listening positions + front/back'

Measuring at one listening position

(single measure)

Follow the procedure below for measurement.

• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the

measurement process (about 3 minutes).

• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select "Measure" and press ENTER.

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER

again to start the measurement immediately.

• To cancelthe measurementtemporarily,pressRETURN.

The following screen appears on the TV when the

measurement finishes.

This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the

measurement.

When "Multi Position" is set to "Yes":

"Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) (RX-V775

only)" (p.40)

When "Multi Position" is set to "No":

"Measuring at one listening position (single measure)" (p.39)

• If any error message (such as E-l) or warning message (such as W-l)

appears, see "Error messages" (p.43) or "Warning messages" (p.44).

• To check the measurement results, select "Result". For details, see

"Checking the measurement results" (p.41).

PREPARATIONS • Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 39

ENTER

RETURN

Use the cursor keys to select "Save/Cancel" and

press ENTER.

To save the measurement results, use the cursor

keys (<_/{>)to select "SAVE" and press ENTER.

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select "CANCEL".

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

C_tio_'_

• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere

where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on

top of AV equipment).

Measuring at multiple listening positions

(multi measure) (RX-V775 only)

When "Multi Position" is set to "Yes", follow the procedure below for

measurement.

• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the

measurement process. It takes about 10 minutes to measure 8 listening positions.

• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.

• If any error message (such as E-l) or warning message (such as W-l) appears,

see "Error messages" (p.43) or "Warning messages" (p.44).

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select "Measure" and press ENTER.

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER

again to start the measurement immediately.

• To cancelthe measurementtemporarily,pressRETURN.

The following screen appears on the TV when the

measurement at the first position finishes.

Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening

position and press ENTER.

Repeat step 2 until measurements at all listening positions

(up to 8) have been taken.

PREPARATIONS • Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 40

When the measurements at the positions you want

to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to

select "CANCEL" and press ENTER,

When you have taken measurements at 8 listening

positions, the following screen appears automatically.

6 Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

Cautior'_

• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere

where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on

top of AV equipment).

ENTER

• To check the measurement results, select "Result". For details, see

"Checking the measurement results" (p.41).

Use the cursor keys to select "Save/Cancer' and

press ENTER.

To save the measurement result, use the cursor

keys to select "SAVE" and press ENTER.

Checking the measurement results

You can check the YPAO measurement results.

After the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select "Result" and press ENTER.

• You can also select "Result" from "Auto Setup" (p.89) in the "Setup" menu,

whichdisplaysthe previousmeasurementresults.

The following screen appears.

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

@ Measurement result items

@ Measurement result details

@ The number of measured positions (when multi

measure is performed) * RX-V775 only

• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select "CANCEL".

PREPARATIONS • Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 41

ON SCREEN

Use the cursor keys to select an item.

Wiring

Size

Polarity of each speaker

Normal: The speaker cable is connected with the

correct polarity (+/-).

Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the

reverse polarity (+/-).

Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the

subwoofer)

Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency

signals effectively.

Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency

signals effectively.

Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker

Level Output level adjustment for each speaker

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments

When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not

suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings

and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.

In the "Setup" menu, select "Speaker", "Auto

Setup", and then "Result" (p.88).

2 Use the cursor keys to select "Setup Reload" and

press ENTER.

ENTER

RETURN

• A speaker with a problem is indicated with a message enclosed in a red box.

To finish checking the results and return to the

previous screen, press RETURN.

3 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

PREPARATIONS • Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 42

Error messages

If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.

E-1 : No Front SP Front speakers are not detected.

E-2: No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected.

E-3: No F.PRNS SP One of the presence speakers cannot be detected.

E-4: SBR _SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only. When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the

on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker.

E-5: Noisy The noise is too loud. Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select

"PROCEED", YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.

Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen

E-6: Check Sur.

speakers are connected, instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect tile speakers.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the

E-7: No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed.

measurement again.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the

E-8: No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones, measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service

center.

E-9: User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select "EXIT".

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact

E-10: Internal Error An internal error has occurred.

the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.

PREPARATIONS • Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 43

Warning messages

If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.

However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.

Select "Wiring" in "Result" (p.41) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by

W-1 : Out of Phase A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity "Reverse". If the speaker is connected incorrectly, turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.

(+/-). Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are

connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.

W-2: Over Distance A speaker is placed more than 24 m (8O ft) from the listening Select "Distance" in "Result" (p.41) and move the speaker identified by ">24.00m (>80.0ft)" within 24 m (80

position, ft) of the listening position.

Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the

W-3: Level Error There are significant volume differences between the subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as

speakers, possible.

PREPARATIONS • Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 44

PLAYBACK

)ut selection keys

MUTE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or

BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.

Use the input selection keys to select an input

source.

Start playback on the external device or select a

radio station.

Refer to the instruction manual for the external device

For details on the following operations, see the

corresponding pages

• Listening to FM/AM radio (p53)

• Playing back iPod music (p58)

• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

(p62)

• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

(p65)

• Listening to Internet radio (p68)

• Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)

(p.70)

Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.

Selecting an HDMI output jack (RX-V775 only)

Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.

Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be

used for signal output changes

HDMIOUTI+2

HDMIOUT1

HDMIOUT2

Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1

and HDMI OUT 2 jacks.

Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.

HDMI OUT Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.

• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.46).

• When "HDMI OUT 1+2" is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest

resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For

example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p

TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.)

• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.

• Toadjustthe treble/basssettings,usethe "Option"menuor TONE

CONTROLon the front panel (p.79).

_ On-screen input selection

@ Press ON SCREEN.

(_) Use the cursor keys to select "Input" and press ENTER.

(_) Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and

press ENTER.

PLAYBACK • Basic playback procedure En 45

SOURCE

)ut selection keys

The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source,

sound program, Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, and HDMI

output jack (RX-V775 only) with just one touch.

Press SCENE.

The input source and settings registered to the

corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on

automatically when it is in standby mode.

By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.

MOVIE

BD/DVD HDMI 1 Off HDMI OUT 1+2

(Sci-Fi)

TV AV 4 STRAIGHT On HDMI OUT 1 +2

NET MUSIC

NET On HDMI OUT 1+2

RADIO (7ch Stereo)

MUSIC

RADIO TUNER On HDMI OUT 1+2

(7ch Stereo)

Configuring scene assignments

Perform the following operations to prepare the

settings you want to assign to a scene.

• Select an input source (p.45)

• Select a sound program (p.47)

• Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.52)

• (RX-V775 only)

Selecting an HDMI output jack (p.45)

Hold down the desired SCENE key until "SET

Complete" appears on the front display.

3 If you want to control the corresponding playback

device after selecting the scene, hold down the

corresponding SCENE key and input selection key

together for more than 3 seconds.

Once the setting is completed successfully, SOURCE blinks twice.

• If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see

"Registering the remote control codes for playback devices" (p.109) to register it.

• You can also configure scene assignments in the "Scene" menu (p.83).

• The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external

device connected to the unit via HDMh To enable SCENE link playback, specify

the device type in "Device Control" (p.84) in the "Scene" menu.

PLAYBACK • Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 46

PROGRAM

ON SCREEN

ENTER

MOVIE

MUSIC

_'_SUR.DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and

surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with

your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo

playback).

_1 Selecting a sound program suitable for movies

• Press MOVIE repeatedly.

This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing

video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.49).

_1 Selecting a sound program suitable for music or

stereo playback

• Press MUSIC repeatedly.

This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening

music sources or stereo playback (p.50).

_1 Selecting a surround decoder

• Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.

This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from

2-channel sources (p.51).

FI Switching to the straight decode mode

• Press STRAIGHT.

This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels

(p.51).

FI Switching to the Pure Direct mode

• Press PURE DIRECT.

This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the

electrical noise from other circuitry (p.52).

_1 Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer

• Press ENHANCER.

This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth

and breadth (p.52).

_ On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection

(_ Press ON SCREEN.

(_) Use the cursor keys to select "Sound Program" and press

ENTER.

(_) Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround

decoder and press ENTER.

• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing

PROGRAM.

• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in

the "Sound Program" menu (p.85).

• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.

• When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz, the

straight decode mode (p.51) is automatically selected.

• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the

speaker indicators on the unit's front panel (p.10) or at the "Audio Signal" screen in

the "Information" menu (p.103).

PLAYBACK • Selecting the sound mode En 47

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields

(CINEMA DSP 3D)

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize

Yamaha's original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you

to easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert

halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields.

Sound program category

"CINEMA DSP -3]" lights up

Enjoying surround sound with headphones

(SILENT CINEMA)

if'_j SILENTTM

CINEMA

You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel

speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the

headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program

or a surround decoder.

Sound program

• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set "CINEMA DSP 3D Mode" (p.79) in the

"Option" menu to "Off".

• We recommend using presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of

the stereoscopic sound fields. However, even when no presence speakers are

connected, the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front,

center, and surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound fields.

Enjoying sound field effects without

surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)

If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and

7ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit

utilizes Yamaha's original virtual surround technology to reproduce

up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the

well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We

recommend using presence speakers in order to enjoy more

effective stereoscopic sound field.

PLAYBACK • Selecting the sound mode En 48

Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)

The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as

movies, TV programs, and games.

_1 MOVIE THEATER

Standard

Spectacle

Sci-Fi

Adventure

Drama

Mono Movie

This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling

without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,

such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the

ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful

reverberations from the left, right, and rear.

This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie

productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the

cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing

everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the

latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of

cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear

separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.

This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and

adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but

puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,

powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth

creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation

of the sounds and the separation of the channels.

This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of

movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The

reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects

and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not

impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You'll never get tired listening for

long periods.

This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,

in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a

pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate

reverberation to the original audio.

rl ENTERTAINMENT

Sports

This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts

and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators'

voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the

stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of

the fans in a suitable space.

Action Game

This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting

games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player

feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater

concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music

Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.

Roleplaying Game

This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This

program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction

of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of

scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music

Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field.

Music Video

This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as

if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere

thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence

sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround

sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.

PLAYBACK • Selecting the sound mode En 49

Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback

(MUSIC)

The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.

You can also select stereo playback.

17 CLASSICAL

This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500

seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful

Hall in Munich

reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener's

virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.

This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a

Hall in Vienna shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings

create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,

producing a very full, rich sound.

This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an

Chamber audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable

for courtly music and chamber music.

[3 LIVE/CLUB

This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and

Cellar Club homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds

that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small

stage.

This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert

The Roxy Theatre venue in Los Angeles. The listener's virtual seat is at the center left of the

hall.

This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a

The Bottom Line famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left

and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

[3 STEREO

Use this program to mix down rnultichannel sources to 2 channels. When

2ch Stereo multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and

output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).

Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back

multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and

7ch Stereo

then outputs tile sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger

sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.

• CINEMA DSP 3D (p.48) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.48) do not work when "2ch Stereo" or "7ch Stereo" is

selected.

PLAYBACK • Selecting the sound mode En 50

Enjoying unprocessed playback

You can play back input sources without any sound field effect

processing.

Playing back in original channels

(straight decode)

When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces

stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as

CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for

multichannel sources.

Press STRAIGHT.

Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is

enabled or disabled.

• To enable 6.1/7.I-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround

back speakers are used, set "Extended Surround" (p.80) in the "Option" menu to a

setting other than "Off".

@ Playing back 2-channel sources in

multichannel (surround decoder)

The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel

playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is

input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode.

For details on each decoder see "Glossary" (p.123).

Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.

Each time you press the key, the surround decoder

changes.

RRPro Logic

RRPLIIx Movie

RRPLII Movie

RRPLIIx Music

NNPLII Music

RRPLIIx Game

RRPLII Game

Neo:6 Cinema

Neo:6 Music

Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all

sources.

Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic II decoder) suitable for movies.

rise the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic II decoder) suitable for music.

Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic II decoder) suitable for games.

Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for movies.

Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for music.

• You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are

connected or when "Surround Back" in the "Setup" menu is set to "None".

PLAYBACK • Selecting the sound mode En Sl

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)

When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the

selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the

electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It

allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.

Press PURE DIRECT.

Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is

enabled or disabled.

• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available.

- Some settings for the speakers or sound programs

- Operating the on-screen and "Option" menus

- Using the multi-zone function

- Output from the AV OUT jacks

- Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)

Enjoying compressed music with enhanced

sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)

compPessed music

ENHANCER

Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the

sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original

sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along

with any other sound modes.

Press ENHANCER.

Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer

is enabled or disabled.

"ENHANCER" lights up

• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling

rate is over 48 kHz.

• You can also use "Enhancer" (p.80) in the "Option" menu to enable/disable

Compressed Music Enhancer.

PLAYBACK • Selecting the sound mode En 52

You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or Selecting a frequency for reception

selecting from registered radio stations.

TUNER

TUNING

• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is

being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used

in U.K. and Europe models.

• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM

antennas.

Setting the frequency steps

(Asia and General models only)

At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and

9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the

frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.

Set the unit to standby mode.

When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel,

press MAIN ZONE _.

MAIN ZONE

Press TUNER to select "TUNER" as the input

source.

Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).

3 Use the following keys to set a frequency.

TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the

key for about a second to search stations automatically.

Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to

select 98.50 MHz, press "9", "8", "5" and "0" (or ENT).

"TUNED" lights up when a signal is received from a radio

station.

"STEREO" also lights up when a stereo signal is received.

Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select "TU".

Press STRAIGHT to select "FM100/AM10".

Press MAIN ZONE _ to set the unit to standby

mode and turn it on again.

• "Wrong Station!" appears when you enter a frequency that is out of

reception range.

• You can switch between "Stereo" (stereo) and "Mono" (monaural) for FM

radio reception in "FM Mode" (p.80) in the "Option" menu. When the signal

reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may

improve it.

PLAYBACK • Listening to FM/AM radio En 53

tUNER

MEMORY

Registering favorite radio stations (presets)

You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have

registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their

preset numbers.

• You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using

"Auto Preset" (p.57).

Registering a radio station

Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.

Follow "Selecting a frequency for reception" (p.53)

to tune into the desired radio station.

Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.

The first time that you do register a station, the selected

radio station will be registered to the preset number "01".

Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered

to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most

recently registered number.

Preset number

• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning

into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and

then press MEMORY again.

Selecting a preset station

Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.

Press TUNER to select "TUNER" as the input

source.

2 Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio

station.

You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by

using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.

• "No Presets" appears when no radio stations are registered.

• "Wrong Num." appears when an invalid number is entered.

• "Empty" appears when a preset number not in use is entered.

• To clear preset stations, use "Clear Preset" or "Clear All Preset" (p.57).

"Empty" (not in use) or the frequency currently registered

PLAYBACK • Listening to FM/AM radio En 54

ENTER

RETURN

mNFO

Radio Data System tuning

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM

stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of

Radio Data System data, such as "Program Service", "Program

Type," "Radio Text" and "Clock Time", when it is tuned into a Radio

Data System broadcasting station.

@ Displaying the Radio Data System

information

Tune into the desired Radio Data System

broadcasting station.

• We recommend using "Auto Preset" to tune into the Radio Data System

broadcasting stations (p.57).

Press INFO.

Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.

Item name

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for

the displayed item appears.

Information

• "Program Service", "Program Type", "Radio Text", and "Clock Time" are not

displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System

service.

Receiving traffic information

automatically

When "TUNER" is selected as the input source, the unit

automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function,

follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station.

When "TUNER" is selected as the input source,

press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select "Traffic Program"

(TrafficProgram) and press ENTER.

The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds.

Press ENTER again to start the search immediately.

• To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor

keys ( / ) while "READY" is displayed.

• To cancel the search, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the

search finishes.

Program Service Program service name

Program Type Current program type

Radio Text Information on the current program

Clock Time Current time

DSP Program Sound mode name

Audio Decoder Decoder name

Frequency Frequency

Traffic information station (frequency)

• "TP Not Found" appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information

stations are found.

PLAYBACK • Listening to FM/AM radio En SS

TUNER

Cursor keys

ENTER

Operating the radio on the TV

You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the

TV.

Press TUNER to select "TUNER" as the input

source.

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

Playback screen

Manual Tuning

Browse

Screen Off

Tuning (+/-)

Auto (+/-)

Memory

Direct

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Switches to FM/AM.

Selects a frequency.

Selects a radio station automatically.

Registers the selected station as

presets.

Enters a frequency directly.

Moves to the browse screen (preset

station list).

Closes the screen display and shows

the background. Press one of the

menu operation keys to redisplay it.

@ Radio station information

Displays tile information of the selected radio station such as the selected

band (FM/AM) and frequency.

(U.K. and Europe models only)

When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.55), the

Radio Data System information ("Program Service", "Program Type,"

"Radio Text" and "Clock Time") is also displayed.

@ Band icon

(Except for U.K. and Europe models)

Select this icon and press ENTER to switch between FM and AM.

@ TUNED/STEREO indicators

"TUNED" lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.

"STEREO" lights up when a stereo signal is received.

@ Operation menu

Press the cursor key( ) and then use ttle cursor keys ( ,_/_) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

PLAYBACK • Listening to FM/AM radio En 56

_,oMenu operation keys

Cursor keys

ENTER

Browse screen

@ Preset station list

Displays tile list of preset stations. Use tile cursor keys to select a preset

station and press ENTERto tune into it.

@ Preset number

@ Operation menu

Press the cursor key( ) and then use ttle cursor keys ( ,_/_) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Memory

Auto Preset

Utility

Clear Preset

Clear All Preset

1 Page Up

1 Page Down

Now Playing

Screen Off

Registers the current station to the

preset number selected in the list.

Automatically registers FM radio

stations with strong signals (up to 40

stations).

Clear the preset station selected in the

list.

Clear all the preset stations.

Moves to the previous/next page of the

list.

Moves to the playback screen.

Closes the screen display and shows

the background. Press one of the

menu operation keys to redisplay it.

• (U.K. and Europe models only)

Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by "Auto

Preset".

PLAYBACK • Listening to FM/AM radio En 57

You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable

supplied with the iPod.

• An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible,

depending on the model or software version of the iPod.

• To play back iPod videos on the unit, an Apple Composite AV Cable (not supplied)

is required. Connect the USB and composite video plugs of the Apple Composite

AV cable to the USB jack and VIDEO jack on the front panel. To select a video,

operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.60).

Supported iPod (as of F÷b_ua_y 2013}

• iPod touch (1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th generation)

• iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th generation)

• iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone

• iPad (3rd generation), iPad 2, iPad

Connecting an iPod

Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the

iPod.

Connect the USB cable to the iPod.

2 Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.

The unit (front)

• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby

mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If

"Network Standby" (p.98) in the "Setup" menu is set to "On", it continues to change

without limit.

• Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.

PLAYBACK • Playing backiPod music En 58

USB

Playback of iPod content

Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start

playback.

You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

Press USB to select "USB" as the input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

Browse screen

,-Menuoperationk_s

Cursorkeys

ENTER

RETURN

• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.

Usethecursorkeysto selectanitem and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

@ Status indicators

Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.61) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

@ List name

@ Contents list

Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys to select an itemand

press ENTERto confirm the selection.

@ Item number/total

@ Operation menu

Press the cursor key ) and then use the cursor keys ( /_) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

1 Page Up

1 Page Down

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

10 Pages Up

10 Pages Down

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Closes the screen display and shows the

Screen Off background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the

simple play mode (p.60).

PLAYBACK • Playing backiPod music En 59

,ooMenuoperationk_s

Cursorkeys

ENTER

RETURN

External device

operation keys

MODE

@ Playback screen

@ Status indicators

Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.61) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

@ Playback information

Displays tile artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining

time.

Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information.

@ Operation menu

Press the cursor key( ) and then use ttle cursor keys ( ,_/_) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

Play Control

Resumes playback from pause.

m Stops playback.

IIII Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Searches forward/backward (by holding

down).

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Closes the screen display and shows the

Screen Off background. Press one of the menu

operation keys to redisplay it.

Operating the iPod itself or remote control

(simple play)

Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.

The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are

enabled.

To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.

Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to

start playback.

Cursorkeys

ENTER

RETURN

External device

operation keys

Select an item.

Confirms the selection.

Returns to the previous screen.

Starts playback or stops playback

temporarily.

Stops playback.

Skips forward/backward.

Searches forward/backward (by holding

down).

• You can also use the external device operation keys on the remote control to

control playback.

PLAYBACK • Playing backiPod music En 60

Repeat/shuffle settings

You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings of your iPod.

• During simple play, configure the repeat/shuffle settings directly on your iPod or

press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.

When "USB" is selected as the input source, press

OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select "Shuffle" (Shuffle) or

"Repeat" (Repeat) and press ENTER.

ENTER

RETURN

MODE

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (<_/I>) to select a setting.

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

Plays back songs in random order. "3C;"

Shuffle Songs (Songs) appears in the TV screen.

(Shuffle)

Albums Plays back albums in random order. "3C;"

(Albums) appears in the TV screen.

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

Repeat One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly.

"(q**-)" appears in the TV screen.

(Repeat)

All (All) Plays back all songs repeatedly. "(-_J"

appears in the TV screen.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

PLAYBACK • Playing backiPod music En 61

USB

You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on

the unit. Refer to the instruction manuals for the USB storage

device for more information.

The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or

FAT32 format).

• The unit supports WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC

files (1- or 2-channel audio only).

• The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC

files, and 48 kHz for other files.

• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer

of the USB storage device.

• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.

Connecting a USB storage device

Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.

The unit (front)

• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In

this case, "Loading..." appears in the front display.

• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.

• Disconnect the USB storage device from the USB jack when it is not in use.

• You cannot connect the PC to the USB jack of the unit.

Playback of USB storage device contents

Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device

contents and start playback.

You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed

on the TV screen.

Press USB to select "USB" as the input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

USB storage device

• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is

displayed.

PLAYBACK • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 62

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

Browse screen

,-Menuoperationk_s

Cursorkeys

ENTER

RETURN

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.

• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden

files) during playback, playback stops automatically.

@ Status indicators

Display tile current repeat/shuffle settings (p.64) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

@ List name

@ Contents list

Displays tile list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to

select an item and press ENTERto confirm the selection.

@ Item number/total

@ Operation menu

Press tile cursor key () and then use the cursor keys (/_) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

1 Page Up

1 Page Down

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

10 Pages Up

10 Pages Down

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Closes the screen display and shows the

Screen Off background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

PLAYBACK • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 63

Cursorkeys

ENTER

RETURN

operation keys

@ Playback screen

@ Status indicators

Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.64) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

@ Playback information

Displays tile artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information.

@ Operation menu

Press the cursor key( ) and then use ttle cursor keys ( ._/_) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

Resumes playback from pause.

m Stops playback.

Play Control IIII Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Closes the screen display and shows the

Screen Off background. Press one of the menu

operation keys to redisplay it.

Repeat/shuffle settings

You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for playback of USB

storage device contents.

When "USB" is selected as the input source, press

OPTION.

2 Use the cursor keys to select "Shuffle" (Shuffle) or

"Repeat" (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (</I>) to select a setting.

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

Shuffle Plays back songs in the current album

(Shuffle) On (On) (folder) in random order. "DC" appears on

the TV screen.

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

Repeat One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly.

"C£,.__,"appears on the TV screen.

(Repeat)

Plays back all songs in the current album

All (All) (folder) repeatedly. "(-**-)" appears on the

TV screen.

4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

• You can also use the external device operation keys (_,,'% IIII, nil, _,G,,q t,,-_,_) on

the remote control to control playback.

PLAYBACK • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 64

YoucanplaybackmusicfilesstoredonyourPCor

DLNA-compatibleNASontheunit.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router

(p.33). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address)

are properly assigned to the unit in "Network" (p.104) in the "Information" menu.

• The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC

and FLAC files (1- or 2-channel audio only).

• The unit is compatible with sampling rates of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC

files, and 48 kHz for other files.

• To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing

of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.

Playback of PC music contents

Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and

start playback.

You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV

screen.

Press NET repeatedly to select "SERVER" as the

input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

ENTER

Media sharing setup

To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible

NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each

music server.

For a PC with Windows Media Player

installed

Check that Windows Media Player 11 or later is

installed on your PC.

In the media sharing settings, enable media sharing

and allow media to be shared with the device.

• If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the

playback screen is displayed.

Use the cursor keys to select a musicserver and

press ENTER.

For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server

software installed

Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and

configure the media sharing settings.

PLAYBACK • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 65

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

Browse screen

,-Menuoperationk_s

Cursorkeys

ENTER

RETURN

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.

• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden

files) during playback, playback stops automatically.

@ Status indicators

Display tile current repeat/shuffle settings (p.67) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

@ List name

@ Contents list

Displays tile list of PC content. Use tile cursor keys to select an item and

press ENTERto confirm the selection.

@ Item number/total

@ Operation menu

Press tile cursor key () and then use the cursor keys (/_) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

1 Page Up

1 Page Down

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

10 Pages Up

10 Pages Down

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Closes the screen display and shows the

Screen Off background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

PLAYBACK • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 66

Cursorkeys

ENTER

RETURN

operation keys

@ Playback screen

@ Status indicators

Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.67) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

@ Playback information

Displays tile artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information.

@ Operation menu

Press the cursor key( ) and then use ttle cursor keys ( ._/_) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

Resumes playback from pause.

m Stops playback.

Play Control H Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Closes the screen display and shows the

Screen Off background. Press one of the menu operation

keys to redisplay it.

Repeat/shuffle settings

You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for the playback of PC

music content.

When "SERVER" is selected as the input source,

press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select "Shuffle" (Shuffle) or

"Repeat" (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (</I>) to select a setting.

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

Shuffle Plays back songs in the current album

(Shuffle) On (On) (folder) in random order. "3C" appears on

the TV screen.

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

Repeat One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly.

"C£,.__,"appears on the TV screen.

(Repeat)

Plays back all songs in the current album

All (All) (folder) repeatedly. "(-**-)" appears on the

TV screen.

4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

• You can also use the external device operation keys (_,,'% Ill, nil, _,G,,q t,,-_,_) on

the remote control to control playback.

• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control

playback. For details, see "DMC Control" (p.83).

PLAYBACK • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 67

YoucanlistentoInternetradiostationsfromallovertheworld.

YoucancontroltheInternetradiowiththemenudisplayedonthe

TVscreen.

• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.33). You can

check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly

assigned to the unit in "Network" (p.104) in the "Information" menu.

• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.

• The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.

• This service may be discontinued without notice.

Press NET repeatedly to select "NET RADIO" as the

input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

ENTER

RETURN

2 Usethecursorkeystoselectanitem and press

ENTER.

If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and

the playback screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

PLAYBACK • Listening to Internet radio En 68

@ Browse screen @ Playback screen

JMenuoperationk_s

Cursorkeys

ENTER

RETURN

Externaldevice

operation keys

@ Playback indicator

@ List name

@ Contents list

Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use tile cursor keys to select an

item and press ENTERto confirm the selection.

@ Item number/total

@ Operation menu

Press the cursor key( ) and then use the cursor keys ( ,_/_) to select an

item. Press ENTERto confirm the selection.

1 Page Up

1 Page Down

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

10 Pages Up

10 Pages Down

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Closes the screen display and shows the

Screen Off background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

@ Playback indicator

@ Playback information

Displays tile station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the cursor keys (,'/_) to select scrollable information.

@ Operation menu

Press the cursor key ([: ) and then use the cursor keys ( /_) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

Play Control m Stops playback.

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Closes the screen display and shows the

Screen Off background. Press one of the menu

operation keys to redisplay it.

• You can also use the external device operation key (In) on the remote control to

stop playback.

• Some information may not be available depending on the station.

• You can register your favorite Internet radio stations to the "Bookmarks" folder by

selecting "NET RADIO" as the input source on the unit and then accessing the

following website with the web browser on your PC. To use this feature, you need

the vTuner ID of the unit and your e-mail address to create your personal account.

You can check the vTunerID (MAC address of the unit) in "Network" (p.104) in the

"Information" menu.

http://yradio.vtuner.com/

PLAYBACK • Listening to Internet radio En 69

The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on

the unit via network.

iTunes

Starts playback

on iTunes

or iPod

Router

The unit

Playback starts

Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents

Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music

contents on the unit.

Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or

display the playback screen on the iPod.

If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon

( _ ) appears.

iTunes (example) iPod (example)

iPod

• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same

router (p.33). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP

address) are properly assigned to the unit in "Network" (p.104) in the "Information"

menu.

S_oport_d iY_nes/iPod (as of Febr_ary 2013}

• iTunes 10.2.2 or later (Windows/Mac)

• iPod touch, iPhone or iPad with lOS 4.3.3 or later

• If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are

connected to the router properly.

On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and

select the unit (network name of the unit) as the

audio output device.

iTunes (example)

D M_J C_m_u_r I

[

iPod (example)

Network name of the unit

Select a song and start playback.

The unit automatically selects "AirPlay" as the input source and

starts playback.

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

PLAYBACK • Playing backiTunes/iPod musicvia a network(AirPlay) En 70

JMenuoperationk_s

Cursorkeys

ENTER

RETURN

Externaldevice

operation keys

• The playback screen is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via

HDMI.

• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by

setting "Network Standby" (p.98) in the "Setup" menu to "On".

• You can edit the network name (the unit's name on the network) displayed on

iTunes/iPod in "Network Name" (p.99) in the "Setup" menu.

• If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the

iTunes/iPod stops automatically.

• You can adjust the unit's volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable

volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set "Volume Interlock" (p.83) in the "Input" menu

to "Off ".

Cautio_

• When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be

unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the

volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod

immediately.

Playback screen

@ Playback indicator

@ Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining

time.

Use the cursor keys (,"/_) to select scro/able information.

@ Operation menu

Press the cursor key( ) and then use the cursor keys ( ," /_) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

Play Control

Screen Off

|11

Resumes playback from pause.

Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation

keys to redisplay it.

• You can also use the external device operation keys (_,_, Ill, II, t-,t-ll l--I,-t) on

the remote control to control playback.

• To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to

configure the iTu nes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers

in advance.

iTunes (example of English version)

Check this box

I J P_everEt _e_s _P_e_, a{_d _Pad_tr_ 9v_ _J_el_c_

PLAYBACK • Playing backiTunes/iPod musicvia a network(AirPlay) En 71

The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input

sources in the room where the unit is installed (Main zone) and in

another room (Zone2).

For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (Main

zone), another person can listen to radio in the study room (Zone2).

: O

iziiii!ii!i i

Study room (Zone2)

Preparing Zone2

Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit. The

connection method varies depending on the amplifier being used

(the unit or an external amplifier).

Oautio_'_

• Remove the unit's power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting

speakers or an external amplifier.

• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or

come into contact with the unit's metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit

or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, "Check SP Wires" will

appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.

Living room (Main zone)

• Analog audio sources (including FM/AM radio), and USB and network sources

can be output to Zone2. To listen to the playback of an external device in Zone2,

you need to connect the device to the AUDIO jacks (AV 5-6 or AUDIO 1-2 jacks)

of the unit.

• (RX-V775 only)

The party mode (p.76) allows you to play back the same audio output in Main zone

as Zone2, whatever the input audio signal type.

PLAYBACK • Playing back musicin multiple rooms(multi-zone) En 72

Using the unit's internal amplifier

Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker

cables.

To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, set "Power

Amp Assign" (p.91) in the "Setup" menu to "7ch +1ZONE" after

connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.

,ill@

iiii:ii_ o o _!o'i:i:i! Zone2

Main zone

• When Zone2 output is enabled (p.75), the surround back speakers in the main

zone do not output sound.

Using an external amplifier

Connect the external amplifier (with volume control) placed in

Zone2 to the unit with a stereo pin cable.

The unit (rear)

'%,° _,

@Pi[_

.... ZONE2 OUT acks

%_T "::

t¢®l

I:__ _T_J _ External amplifier

-- L____J | Audio input

_ _ _ _ zoO&

Mainzone

PLAYBACK • Playing back musicin multiple rooms(multi-zone) En 73

Operating the unit from Zone2

(remote connection)

You can operate the unit and external devices from Zone2 using the

supplied remote control if you connect an infrared signal

receiver/emitter to the unit's REMOTE IN/OUT jacks.

• To operate external devices with the supplied remote control, you must register a

remote control code for each device before using (p.108).

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

Remote connections between Yamaha products

An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using

Yamaha products that support remote connections, as the unit

does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting the

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an

infrared signal receiver.

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

The unit (rear)

Infrared signal

transmitter

External device

(such as a CD player)

Main zone

Infrared signal

receiver

_'i:ii¸ ........................................

Zone2

Remote control

Zone2

PLAYBACK • Playing back musicin multiple rooms(multi-zone) En 74

Controlling Zone2 4

USB

NET

MAIN/ZONE2

MUTE

SLEEP

Set MAIN/ZONE2 to "ZONE2".

Press RECEIVER _.

Each time you press the key, Zone2 output is enabled or

disabled.

When Zone2 output is enabled, "ZONE2" lights up in the

front display.

Use the following keys to select an input source.

AV 5-6: AV 5-6 (AUDIO) jacks

AUDIO 1-2: AUDIO 1-2 jacks

TUNER: FM/AM radio

USB: USB jack (on the front panel)

NET: NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a desired

network source)

PHONO: PHONO jacks (RX-V775 only [except for U.S.A.

and Canada models])

• You cannot select USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For

example, if you select "SERVER" for Zone2 when "USB" is selected for the

main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to "SERVER".

Start playback on the external device or select a

radio station.

Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.

For details on the following operations, see the

corresponding pages.

• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.53)

• Playing back iPod music (p.58)

• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

(p.62)

• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

(p.65)

• Listening to Internet radio (p.68)

• Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)

(p.70)

• The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display

to control Zone2.

• AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the

main zone.

• To set the sleep timer (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off), press SLEEP

repeatedly. The Zone2 output will be disabled after a specified period of

time.

• To adjust the Zone2 volume, press VOLUME or MUTE (when using the

unit's internal amplifier). When using an external amplifier, use the volume

control on it.

• To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2.

PLAYBACK • Playing back musicin multiple rooms(multi-zone) En 75

Enjoying the same source in multiple

rooms (party mode)

(RX-V775 only)

The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music

that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode,

stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this

function when you want to use main zone music as background

music for a house party.

Press PARTY.

Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or

off.

When the party mode is turned on, "PARTY" lights up in the

front display.

• If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set "Party Mode Set" (p.100) in

the "Setup" menu to "Enable" (default).

PLAYBACK • Playing back musicin multiple rooms(multi-zone) En 76

Switching information on the front display

Press INFO.

Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.

Item name

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for

the displayed item appears.

Information

NET RADIO

PHONO

Song (song title), Album (album name), Station

(station name), DSP Program (sound mode name),

Audio Decoder (decoder name*)

(RX-V775 only [except for U.S.A. and Canada

models[)

Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound

mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)

* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio

decoder is activated, "Decoder Off" appears.

Viewing the status information on the TV

INFO

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed

item can also be applied separately to each input source group.

HDMI 1-5

V-AUX

AV 1-6

AUDIO 1-2

TUNER

USB

SERVER

AirPlay

Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound

mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)

Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode

name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)

* (U.K. and Europe models only)

Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is

tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.55).

Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album

name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio

Decoder (decoder name*)

* During simple playback of iPod:

Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode

name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)

Press DISPLAY.

The following information is displayed on the TV.

Compressed Music Enhancer status

Inf

Party mode

status*

Audio

Decoder mode

CINEMA DSP status

* RX-V775 only

2 To close the information display, press DISPLAY.

PLAYBACK • Viewing the current status En 77

You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This

menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily

configure settings during playback.

Press OPTION.

Option menu items

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

Front display

TV screen

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys (</[>) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Tone Control Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency 79

(Tone Control) range of sounds.

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to

Adaptive DRC minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume 79

(Adaptive DRC) is adjusted.

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode

(CINEMA DSP 3D) Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 79

Dialogue Level Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. 79

DialogueAdjust (Dialog LvI)

(Dialog Adjust) Dialogue Lift

(Dialog Lift) Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. 79

Extended Surround Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources 80

(EXTD Surround) when surround back speakers are used.

Input Trim Corrects volume differences between input sources. 80

Volume Trim (In.Trim)

(Volume Trim) Subwoofer

Trim (SW.Trim) Fine-adjusts tile subwoofer volume. 80

Enhancer

(Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 80

Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing 80

(Video Mode) settings configured in the "Setup" menu.

FM Mode Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio

(FM Mode) reception. 80

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Traffic Program Automatically searches for a traffic information 55

(TrafficProgram) station.

Repeat Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.61),

(Repeat) USB storage device (p.64), or media server (p.67).

Shuffle Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.61),

(Shuffle) USB storage device (p.64), or media server (p.67).

PLAYBACK • Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 78

Tone Control (Tone Control)

Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.

Choices

Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)

Setting range

-6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 riB, *0.5 dB increments

Default

Bypass (Bypass)

• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.

Adjusting with the front panel controls

(_ Press TONE CONTROL to select "Treble" or "Bass".

(_) Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

Adaptive DRC (Adaptive DRC)

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted

when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to "On", it is useful for listening to

playback at a low volume at night.

Settings

On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range.

Off (Off) (default) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.

If "On" is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a

high volume.

Volume: low Volume: high

Input level Input level

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (CINEMA DSP 3D)

Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.48). If this function is set to "On", CINEMA DSP

3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo).

Settings

On (On) (default) EnablesCINEMA DSP 3D.

Off (Off) Disables CINEMA DSP 3D.

Dialogue Adjust (Dialog Adjust)

Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.

Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you

can turn up its volume by increasing this setting.

Setting range

0to3

Default

Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is coming

from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this setting.

• This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.

- One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when presence speakers

are used.

- Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.48) is working.

(Youmayhear dialoguesoundsfromthe surroundspeakersdependingon the listeningposition.)

Setting range

0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)

Default

E E

Ideal position

PLAYBACK • Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 79

Extended Surround (EXTD Surround)

Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers

are used.

Settings

Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if signals that contain

Auto (Auto) surround back channel signals are input, and reproduces the signals

(default) in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. If two surround back speakers are connected,

the unit reproduces the 5.1-channel signals in 7.1-channel.

ITIPLIIx Movie Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic

IIx Movie decoder. This setting is available only when two surround

(ITIPLIIxMo) back speakers are connected.

ITIPLIIx Music Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro

Logic IIx Music decoder. This setting is available only when one or two

(ITIPLIIxMu) surround back speakers are connected.

Automatically selects the Dolby EX or DTS-ES decoder, and

EX/ES (EX/ES) reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel.

Always reproduces signals in their original channels. (Even when

Off (Off) DTS-ES or Dolby Digital Surround EX signal is input, the unit

reproduces the signal in 5.1-channek)

• Some early Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES sources do not contain a flag for reproducing surround

back channel. We recommend you set "Extended Surround" to "ITIPLllx Movie" or "EX/ES" when playing

back those sources.

Volume Trim (Volume Trim)

Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume.

Input Trim (In.Trim)

Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume

differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Setting range

-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Default

0.0 dB

CI Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)

Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.

Setting range

-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Default

0.0 dB

Enhancer (Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.52).

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer

(p.52).

Settings

Off (Off)

On (On)

Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.

Default

TUNER, USB, (network sources): On (On)

Others: Off (Off)

Video Mode (Video Mode)

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings

configured in "Processing" (p.95) in the "Setup" menu.

Settings

Processing

(Processing) Enables the video signal processing.

Direct (Direct)

(default) Disables the video signal processing.

FM Mode (FM Mode)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.

Settings

Stereo (Stereo) Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.

(default)

Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.

PLAYBACK • Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 80

CONFIGURATIONS

You can change the input source settings using the TVscreen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select "Input" and press ENTER.

4 Use the cursor keys (A/V) to select an item and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/I>) to select an input source to be configured

and press the cursor key (A).

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

5 Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

6 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Input menu items

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.

The input source of the unit also changes.

• You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (/:) after Step 3.

Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 82

Audio In Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an 82

audio jack of others.

Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 82

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via

Volume Interlock AirPlay. 83

Video Out Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. 83

DMC Control Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media 83

Controller (DMC) to control playback.

CONFIGURATIONS • Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 81

Rename/Icon Select

Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.

Input sources

HDMI 1-5, V-AUX,AV 1-6, AUDIO 1-2, USB, PHONO*

* RX-V775only (exceptfor U.S.A.andCanadamodels)

Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys (<]/1>) to select a template and press the cursor key (V).

• You cannot change the template or icon for "USB" when an iPod is connected.

Use the cursor keys (<]/1>) to select an icon and press the cursor key (V).

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select "ENTER" to confirm the entry.

• To clear the entry, select "CLEAR".

Use the cursor keys to select "OK" and press ENTER.

Audio In

Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others. For

example, use this function in the following cases.

• Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output, but not HDMI audio

output

• Connecting a playback device that has component video jacks and analog stereo

jacks (such as game consoles)

Input sources

HDMI 1-5, AV 1-2

Setup procedure

(To input audio through a digital optical jack)

Select "AVI" or "AV4" and connect the device to the unit's corresponding audio jacks

with a digital optical cable.

(To input audio through a digital coaxial jack)

Select "AV2" or "AV3" and connect the device to the unit's corresponding audio jacks

with a digital coaxial cable.

(To input audio through analog audio jacks)

Select "AV5", "AV6", "AUDIO1 ", or "AUDIO2", and connect the device to the unit's

corresponding audio jacks with a stereo pin cable.

Decoder Mode

Sets the format of digital audio playback to "DTS".

For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set "Decoder

Mode" to "DTS".

Input sources

HDMI 1-5, V-AUX,AV 1-4

Settings

Auto (default) Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.

DTS Selects DTSonly. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)

• To restore the default setting, select "RESET".

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

CONFIGURATIONS • Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 82

Volume Interlock

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.

Input sources

AirPlay

Settings

Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range

Limited (default) (-8(} dB to 0 dB and mute).

Full Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to

+16.5 dB and mute).

Video Out

Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.

Input sources

TUNER, (network sources)

Settings

Off (default) Does not output video.

HDMI 1-5, AV 1-6,

V-AUX Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.

DMC Control

Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control

playback.

Input source

SERVER

Settings

Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback.

Enable (default) Allows DMCs to control playback.

You can change the settings of the SCENEfunction (p.46) using the TVscreen.

Press ON SCREEN.

2 Use the cursor keys to select "Scene" and press ENTER.

3 Use the cursor keys (q/;>) to select a scene to be configured and

press the cursor key (A).

• You can still switch the scene by using cursor keys ( ::/: ) after Step 3.

• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.

When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media

Player 12) on the same network.

CONFIGURATIONS • Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 83

4 Use the cursor keys (A/V) to select an item and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Scene menu items

Load

Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.

Select "DETAIL" to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene

assignments.

17 Device Control

Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected to

the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback)

Settings

Off Disables the SCENE link playback function.

Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this

if an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is

HDMI Control

connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports

HDMI Control.

Default

SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control

SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO): Off

Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. 84

Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can

Load also configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the 84

scene assignments.

Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 85

Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 85

Save

Registers the unit's current settings (input source, sound program/surround decoder,

Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, and HDMI output jack [RX-V775 only]) in the

selected scene.

• To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set "HDMI

Control" in the "Setup" menu to "On" and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.127).

17 Detail

Displays the assignments of the selected scene.

Input Input source to be used

(RX-V775 only)

HDMI Output

HDMI OUT jack to be used

Mode Sound program/surround decoder to be used

Enhancer Compressed Music Enhancer on/off

• If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device

assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.46).

CONFIGURATIONS • Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 84

Rename/Icon Select

Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.

Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys (<1/1>) to select an icon and press the cursor key (v).

You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the

TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

2 Use the cursor keys to select "Sound Program" and press ENTER.

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select "ENTER" to confirm the

entry.

3 Use the cursor keys (<_/_>) to select a sound program to be

configured and press the cursor key (A).

• To clear the entry, select "CLEAR".

4 Use the cursor keys to select "OK" and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select "RESET".

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

@ Reset

Restores the default settings (p.46) for the selected scene.

• You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (:/:) after Step 3.

CONFIGURATIONS • Configuring sound programs/surround decoders(Sound Program menu) En 85

Sound Program menu items

4 Use the cursor keys (A/V) to select an item and press ENTER.

• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder.

@ Settings for sound programs

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select "Reset".

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Decode Type

Selects a surround decoder to be used

in combination with the selected sound

program.

ITIPro Logic*, fTIPLIIx Movie

(FrtPLII Movie), FrtPLIIx

Music* (BDPLII Music*),

ITIPLIIx Game* (fTIPLII

Game*), Neo:6 Cinema,

Neo:6 Music*

(* Available only when

"SURROUND DECODER" is

selected)

-6 dB to +3 dB (default: 0 dB)

DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level. Higher to enhance the sound

field effect, and lower to

reduce it.

Adjusts the delay between the direct 1 ms to 99 ms

Initial Delay sound and presence sound field Higher to enhance the delay

generation, effect, and lower to reduce it.

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and surround sound field

generation.

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and surround back sound field

generation.

Adjusts the broadening effect of the

presence sound field.

Adjusts the broadening effect of the

surround sound field.

Adjusts the broadening effect of the

surround back sound field.

Adjusts the loss of the presence sound

field.

Adjusts the loss of the surround sound

field.

Adjusts the loss of the surround back

sound field.

Surround Initial Delay

Surround Back Initial

Delay

Room Size

Surround Room Size

Surround Back Room

Size

Liveness

Surround Liveness

Surround Back

Liveness

1 ms to 49 ms

Higher to enhance the delay

effect, and lower to reduce it.

0.1 to 2.0

Higher to enhance the

broadening effect, and lower

to reduce it.

()to 10

Higher to enhance the

reflectivity, and lower to

reduce it.

CONFIGURATIONS • Configuring sound programs/surround decoders(Sound Program menu) En 86

Reverb Time

Reverb Delay

Adjust the decay time of the rear

reverberant sound.

1.0 s to 5.0 s

Higher to enrich the

reverberant sound and lower

to have clear sound.

Adjusts the delay between the direct 0 ms to 250 ms

sound and reverberant sound Higher to enhance the delay

generation, effect, and lower to reduce it.

Reverb Level Adjusts the volume of the reverberant

sound.

0% to 100%

Higher to strengthen the

reverberant sound, and lower

to weaken it.

The following items are available when you select "2ch Stereo" or "7ch Stereo".

Selects whether to

automatically bypass the

2ch Stereo Direct DSP circuit when an Auto (default), Off

analog audio source is

played back.

Level Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to +5 (default: 0)

-5 to +5 (default: 0)

Front / Rear Balance Adjusts the front and rear Higher to enhance the front

volume balance, side, and lower to enhance

the rear side.

-5 to +5 (default: 0)

Left / Right Balance Adjusts the right and left Higher to enhance the right

volume balance, side, and lower to enhance

the left side.

7ch Stereo

Height Balance

Adjust the height volume

balance using the

presence speakers.

0 to 10 (default: 5)

Higher to enhance the

upside, and lower to

enhance the downside. (The

presence speakers do not

produce sounds when

"Height Balance" is set to

"0".)

Monaural Mix Enables/disables Off (default), On

monaural sound output.

Settings for decoders

The following items are available when you set "Decode Type" of "Surround Decoder"

to "rT'IPLIIx Music" or "Neo:6 Music".

ITiPLIIx Music

Panorama

Center Width

Adjusts the broadening

effect of the front sound

field.

Off (default), On

Select "On" to wrap front right/left

channel sounds around the field

and generate a spacious sound

field in combination with the

surround sound field.

Dimension

Adjusts the broadening

effect of the center

sound field.

0 to 7 (default: 3)

Higher to enhance the broadening

effect, and lower to reduce it

(closer to center).

Neo:6 Music Center Image

Adjusts the difference in

level between the front

and surround sound

fields.

-3 to +3 (default: 0)

Higher to strengthen the front

sound field and lower to strengthen

the surround sound field.

Adjusts the center

orientation level

(broadening effect) of

the front sound field.

0.0 to 1.0 (default: 0.3)

Higher to strengthen the center

orientation level (less broadening

effect) and lower to weaken (more

broadening effect).

• Available items in "7ch Stereo" vary depending on the speaker system being used.

CONFIGURATIONS • Configuring sound programs/surround decoders(Sound Program menu) En 87

You can configure the unit's various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select "Setup" and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

5 Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

6 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys (<d/I>) to select a menu.

4 Use the cursor keys (A/V) to select an item and press ENTER.

CONFIGURATIONS • Configuring various functions(Setup menu) En 88

Setup menu items

Speaker

Auto Setup

Power Amp Assign

Manual Setup

Lipsync

Sound Dynamic Range

Max Volume

Initial Volume

Adaptive DSP Level

Video Video Mode

HDMI Control

HDMI Audio Output

Standby Through

Configuration

Distance

Level

Parametric EQ

Test Tone

Delay Enable

Auto/Manual Select

Adjustment

Front

Center

Surround

Surround Back

Front Presence

Subwoofer

Extra Bass

Bass Cross Over

Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 37

Selects a speaker system. 91

Selects the size of the front speakers. 91

Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 91

Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 91

Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 92

Selects whether or not presence speakers are connected. 92

Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. 92

Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components. 92

Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to "Small". 92

Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 93

Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 93

Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 93

Enables/disables the test tone output. 94

Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 94

Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 94

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 94

Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 94

Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 95

Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 95

Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level when the volume is adjusted. 95

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). 95

Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 96

Selects a device to output audio. 97

Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 97

CONFIGURATIONS • Configuring various functions(Setup menu) En 89

IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 98

Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 98

Network

MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 98

Network Name Edits the network name (the unit's name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 99

Main Zone Set Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the TV screen. 99

Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone. 100

Zone2 Set Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 100

Multi Zone

Zone Rename Changes tile zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the TV screen. 100

(RX-V775 only) 100

Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode.

Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 100

Display Set Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated. 100

Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 101

Function Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 101

Trigger Output

Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 101

DC OUT Power Mode Selects how to supply power through the DC OUT jack. 101

Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 102

Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 102

ECO

ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 102

Language Select an on-screen menu language. 103

CONFIGURATIONS • Configuring various functions(Setup menu) En 90

Speaker (Manual Setup)

Configures the speaker settings manually.

Front

Selects the size of the front speakers.

Settings

Select this option for large speakers.

Large The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency

components.

Select this option for small speakers.

Small (default) The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components

(configurable in "Bass Cross Over").

Power Amp Assign

Selects a speaker system.

In addition to the 5.1- or 7.1-channel speaker system, various speaker configurations

are possible using the presence speakers, Zone2 speakers, or bi-amp connection.

Settings

Select this option when you use a normal speaker system (not using

Basic (default) Zone2 speakers or a bi-amp connection).

7ch +1ZONE Select this option when you use Zone2 speakers (p.73) in addition to

the speaker system in the main zone.

5ch BI-AMP Select this option when you connect front speakers that support

bi-amp connections (p.21).

Configuration

Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.

• When you configure the speaker size, select "Large" if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm

(6-1/4") or larger or "Small" if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4").

• "Front" is automatically set to "Large" when "Subwoofer" is set to "None".

Center

Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.

Settings

Select this option for large speakers.

Large The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency

components.

Select this option for small speakers.

Small (default) The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel

low-frequency components (configurable in "Bass Cross Over").

Select this option when no center speaker is connected.

None

The front speakers will produce center channel audio.

Surround

Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.

Settings

Select this option for large speakers.

Large The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel

frequency components.

Select this option for small speakers.

Small (default) The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel

low-frequency components (configurable in "Bass Cross Over").

Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.

None The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual

CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.

CONFIGURATIONS • Configuring various functions(Setup menu) En 91

17 Surround Back

Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.

Settings

Select this option when one large speaker is connected.

Large xl The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back

channel frequency components.

Select this option when two large speakers are connected.

Large x2 The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back

channel frequency components.

Select this option when one small speaker is connected.

Small xl The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel

low-frequency components (configurable in "Bass Cross Over").

Select this option when two small speakers are connected.

Small x2 (default) The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel

low-frequency components (configurable in "Bass Cross Over").

None Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.

The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.

• This setting is not available when "Power Amp Assign" is set to "5ch BI-AMP", or when "Surround" is set to

"None".

[_ Front Presence

Selects whether or not presence speakers are connected.

Settings

Use (default) Select this option when presence speakers are connected.

None Select this option when no presence speakers are connected.

17 Subwoofer

Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase.

Settings

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase not

Normal

(default) reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect)

channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels.

Use

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase reversed).

Reverse The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio

and low-frequency components from other channels.

Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front

None speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and

low-frequency components from other channels.

• When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.

[_ Extra Bass

Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components.

Settings

Off (default) Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the subwoofer or

front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components.

Both the front speakers and subwoofer produce the front channel

low-frequency components.

• This setting is not available when "Subwoofer" is set to "None", or when "Front" is set to "Small".

Bass CrossOver

Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a speaker

whose size is set to "Small". A frequency sound lower than the specified value will be

produced from the subwoofer or front speakers

Settings

40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz (default), 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz

• If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and

crossover frequency to maximum.

CONFIGURATIONS • Configuring various functions(Setup menu) En 92

Distance

Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the

speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance

from "Meter" or "Feet".

Choices

Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,

Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer

Setting range

0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments

Default

3,00 m (10,0 ft)

Level

Adjusts the volume of each speaker.

Choices

Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,

Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer

Setting range

-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Default

0,0 dB

Parametric EQ

Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.

Settings

Manual

YPAO:Flat

YPAO:Front

YPAO:Natural

Through

Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.

For details, see "Manual equalizer adjustment".

Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.

Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as

the front speakers.

Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.

Does not use the equalizer.

Manual equalizer adjustment

Set "Parametric EQ" to "Manual" and press ENTER.

2 Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.

3 Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.

• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select "PEQ Data Clear" and then "OK".

• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with "Auto Setup" (p.37) to the "Manual" fields for

fine adjustment, select "PEQ Data Copy" and then an equalizer type.

4 Use the cursor keys (<]/1>) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands

and the cursor keys (A/V) to adjust the gain.

Setting range

Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB

To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER

repeatedly to select an item.

Frequency: Use the cursor keys (]/) to adjust the center frequency of the selected

band and the cursor keys( / ) to adjust the gain.

Q: Use the cursor keys (,/i) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and

the cursor keys( / ) to adjust the gain.

Setting range

Center frequency: 31.3 HZ to 16.0 kHz

Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080

6 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

• "YPAO:Flat', "YPAO:Front", and "YPAO:Natural" are available only when the measurement results of "Auto

Setup" have already been saved (p.37). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.

CONFIGURATIONS • Configuring various functions(Setup menu) En 93

@ Test Tone

Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker

balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.

Settings

Off (default) Does not output test tones.

On Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance

or equalizer.

Sound

Configures the audio output settings.

Lipsync

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.

Delay Enable

Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.

Choices

HDMI 1-5, AV 1-6, V-AUX, AUDIO 1-2

Settings

Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.

Enable (default) Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.

_] Auto/Manual Select

Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.

Setting range

Auto (default)

Manual

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when

a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the

unit via HDMI.

If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in

"Adjustment".

Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video

and audio output manually.

Adjust the audio output timing in "Adjustment".

• Even if "Auto/Manual Select" is set to "Auto", the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV

connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in "Adjustment".

Adjustment

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when "Auto/Manual

Select" is set to "Manual". You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when

"Auto/Manual Select" is set to "Auto".

Setting range

0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)

Default

0 ms

• "Offset" shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment.

@ Dynamic Range

Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and

DTS signals) playback.

Settings

Maximum (default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.

Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.

Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low

volumes.

Minimum/Auto

When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is

automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.

CONFIGURATIONS • Configuring various functions(Setup menu) En 94

Max Volume

Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.

Setting range

-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments +16.5dB

Default

+16,5 dB

Initial Volume

Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.

Settings

Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered

Off (default) standby mode.

Sets at Mute orthe specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB

On increments).

(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than "Max

Volume".)

Adaptive DSP Level

Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level when the volume

is adjusted.

Settings

Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically.

On (default) Adjusts the effect level automatically.

Video

Configures the video output settings.

Video Mode

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio).

Settings

Direct (default) Disables the video signal processing.

Processing Enables the video signal processing.

Select a resolution and an aspect ratio in "Resolution" and "Aspect".

• When "Video Mode" is set to "Direct", the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to

reduce video output delay.

• When "Video Mode" is set to "Processing" and the resolution is being converted, short messages are not

displayed on the TV screen.

17 Resolution

Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when "Video Mode" is set to

"Processing".

Settings

Through Does not convert the resolution.

Auto (default) Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.

480p/576p, 720p, Output video signals with a selected resolution.

1080i, 1080p, 4K (Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)

• If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set "MON.CHK" (p.106) in the

"ADVANCED SETUP" menu to "SKIP" and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on

your TV normally.)

CONFIGURATIONS • Configuring various functions(Setup menu) En 95

Aspect

Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when "Video Mode" is set to

"Processing".

Settings

Through (default) Does not convert the aspect ratio.

16:9 Normal Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side

of the screen.

HDMI

Configures the HDMI settings.

• This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or

2160p (4K) signals.

HDMI Control

Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.127).

Settings

Off (default) Disables HDMI Control.

Enables HDMI Control.

On Configure the settings in "TV Audio Input", "ARC" and "Standby

Sync".

• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.127) after connecting HDMI

Control-compatible devices.

17 TV Audio Input

Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when "HDMI

Control" is set to "On". The unit's input source automatically switches to TV audio when

the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.

Settings

AV 1-6, AUDIO 1-2

Default

AV4

• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting

an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.

CONFIGURATIONS • Configuring various functions(Setup menu) En 96

_1 ARC

Enables/disables ARC (p.23) when "HDMI Control" is set to "On".

Settings

Off Disables ARC.

On (default) Enables ARC.

• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected

to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set "ARC" to

"Off" and use the TV's speakers.

Standby Sync

Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit

when "HDMI Control" is set to "On".

Settings

off

Auto (default)

Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the

unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.

Audio Output

Selects a device to output audio.

HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2 (RX-V775 only)

HDMI OUT (RX-V675 only)

Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack.

Settings

Off (default) Disables the audio output from the TV.

On Enables the audio output from the TV.

Standby Through

Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the

unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to "On", you can use the input selection

keys (HDMI 1-5, V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode

(the standby indicator on the unit blinks).

Settings

Off (default) Does not output videos/audio to the TV.

On Outputs videos/audio to the TV.

(The unit consumes more power than when "Off" is selected.)

• This setting is available only when "HDMI Control" is set to "Off".

• This setting (except for "HDMI OUT2" [RX-V775 only]) is available only when "HDMI Control" is set to "Off".

CI Amp

Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers connected to the unit.

Settings

Off Disables the audio output from the speakers.

On (default) Enables the audio output from the speakers.

CONFIGURATIONS • Configuring various functions(Setup menu) En 97

Network

Configures the network settings.

IP Address

Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).

17 DHCP

Select whether to use a DHCP server.

Settings

Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters

Off

manually. For details, see "Manual network settings".

Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit's network

On (default) parameters (such as IP address).

Manual network settings

Set "DHCP" to "Off".

Use the cursor keys (A/V) to select a parameter type and press ENTER.

IP Address Specifies an IP address.

Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask.

Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.

DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.

DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.

Use the cursor keys (<I/1>) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (A/V) to

select a value.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.

6 To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select "OK" and press ENTER.

7 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Network Standby

Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network

standby).

Settings

Off (default) Disables the network standby function.

Enables the network standby function.

(The unit consumes more power than when "Off" is selected.)

MAC Address Filter

Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.

_1 Filter

Enables/disables the MAC address filter.

Settings

Off (default) Disables tile MAC address filter.

Enables the MAC address filter. In "MAC Address 1-10", specify the

On MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access

to the unit.

_1 MAC Address 1-10

Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted

access to the unit when "Filter" is set to "On".

Procedure

Use the cursor keys (A/V) to select "MAC Address 1-5" or "MAC Address 6-10"

and press ENTER.

2 Use the cursor keys (A/V) to select an MAC address number and press ENTER.

3 Use the cursor keys (<I/1>) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (A/V) to

select a value.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select "OK" and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

CONFIGURATIONS • Configuring various functions(Setup menu) En 98

Network Name

Edits the network name (the unit's name on the network) displayed on other network

devices.

Procedure

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select "ENTER" to confirm the

entry.

Multi Zone

Configures the multi zone settings.

• To clear the entry, select "CLEAR".

Use the cursor keys to select "OK" and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select "RESET".

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Main Zone Set

Configures the main zone setting.

[_ Zone Rename

Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the TV screen.

Procedure

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

2 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select "ENTER" to confirm the

entry.

• To clear the entry, select "CLEAR".

Use the cursor keys to select "OK" and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select "RESET".

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

CONFIGURATIONS • Configuring various functions(Setup menu)

En 99

@ Zone2 Set

Configures the Zone2 settings.

17 Max Volume

Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.

Setting range

-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB

Default

+16,5 dB

Function

Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.

• This setting is available only when "Power Amp Assign" (p.91) is set to "7ch +1ZONE".

17 Initial Volume

Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.

Settings

Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby

Off (default) mode.

Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB

On increments).

(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than "Max Volume".)

• This setting is available only when "Power Amp Assign" (p.91) is set to "7ch +1ZONE".

Zone Rename

Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the TV screen.

You can change the zone name in the same manner as "Zone Rename" in "Main Zone

Set" (p.99).

Party Mode Set

(RX-V775 only)

Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.76).

Choice

Target: Zone 2

Settings

Disable Disables switching to the party mode.

Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party

Enable (default) mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control.

@ Display Set

Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.

17 Dimmer (Front Display)

Adjusts the brightness of the front display.

Setting range

-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)

Default

• The front display may become dark when "ECO Mode" (p.102) is set to "On".

Short Message

Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated

(such as input selection and volume adjustment).

Settings

On (default) Displays short messages on the TV screen.

Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen.

CONFIGURATIONS • Configuring various functions(Setup menu) En100

_1 Wallpaper

Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.

Settings

Picture 1 (default), Displays the selected image on the TV screen when there is no video

Picture 2, Picture 3 signal.

Gray Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video

signal.

Trigger Output

Sets the TRIGGER OUT jack to function in sync with the power status of each zone or

input switching.

_1 Trigger Mode

Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.

Settings

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the

Power (default) zone specified with "Target Zone."

The TRIGGER O! IT jack fi Jnctions in sync with the inp_Jtswitching in

Source the zone specified with "Target Zone."

An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in

"Source."

Manual Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal

transmission with "Manual."

Source

Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching

when "Trigger Mode" is set to "Source".

Choices

HDMI 1-5, AV 1-6, V-AUX, AUDIO 1-2, TUNER, PHONO*, (network sources), USB

* RX-V775 only (except for U.S.A. and Canada models)

Settings

Low Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input

source specified in this option.

Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source

High (default) specified in this option.

Manual

Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when "Trigger

Mode" is set to "Manual". This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of

the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.

Choices

Low Stops the electronic signal transmission.

High (default) Transmits the electronic signal.

Target Zone

Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.

Settings

Main

Zone2

All (default)

When "Trigger Mode" is set to "Power," electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the power status of the main zone.

When "Trigger Mode" is setto "Source," electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.

When "Trigger Mode" is set to "Power," electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the power status of Zone2.

When "Trigger Mode" is setto "Source," electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.

When "Trigger Mode" is set to "Power," electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the power status of the main zone or Zone2.

When "Trigger Mode" is setto "Source," electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone or Zone2.

DC OUT

Configures the DC OUT jack setting.

[_ Power Mode

Selects how to supply power to the Yamaha AV accessory connected to the DC OUT

jack.

Settings

Supplies power through the DC OUT jack continuously regardless of

Continuous (default) the power state (on/standby) of the unit.

Main Zone Power Supplies power through the DC OUT jack only when the main zone is

turned on.

Sync. (This setting may not work properly on some accessories.)

CONFIGURATIONS • Configuring various functions(Setup menu) En101

Memory Guard

Prevents accidental changes to the settings.

Settings

Off (default) Does not protect the settings.

On Protects the settings until "Off" is selected.

• When "Memory Guard" is set to "On", the lock icon (i_1) is displayed on the menu screen.

Icon

ECO

Configures the power supply settings.

Auto Power Standby

Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit for

the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode.

Settings

Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for

2 hours, 4 hours,

the specified time. For example, when "2 hours" is selected, the unit

8 hours, 12 hours will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.

Default

U.K. and Europe models: 8 hours

Other models: Off

• Just before the unit enters standby mode, "AutoPowerStdby" appears and then countdown starts in the

front display.

EGO Mode

Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.

When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit's power consumption.

Settings

Off (default) Disables the eco mode.

On Enables the eco mode.

• The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted.

• When "ECO Mode" is set to "On", the front panel display may become dark.

• If you want to play audio at high volume, set "ECO Mode" to "Off".

CONFIGURATIONS • Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En102

Language

Select an on-screen menu language.

Settings

English (default) English

[] _ Japanese

Francais French

Deutsch German

Espaflol Spanish

Pycc_<_4_ Russian

Italiano Italian

_ Chinese

• The information on the front display is provided in English only.

You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

2 Use the cursor keys to select "Information" and press ENTER.

3 Use the cursor keys (<diD) to select an information type.

4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

CONFIGURATIONS • Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) En103

Types of information

Audio Signal

Displays information about the current audio signal.

Format Audio format of the input signal

The number of source channels in the input signal

Channel (front/surround/LFE)

For example, "5.1 (3/2/0.1)" means 5. lch in total

Input (3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE).

Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal

Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal

Dialogue The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal

Output The speaker terminals from which signals are output

• Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the

specifications and settings of the playback device.

Video Signal

Displays information about the current video signal.

HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output

HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)

Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT

Analog Resolution jacks (analog)

HDMI Monitor

Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.

Interface TV interface

Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV

• (RX-V775 only)

Use the cursor keys ( / ) to switch between "OUT1" and "OUT2".

Network

Displays the network information on the unit.

IP Address IP address

Subnet Mask Subnet mask

Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway

DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server

DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server

MAC Address MAC address

Network Name Network name (the unit's name on the network)

Status The connection status of the NETWORK jack

@ System

Displays the system information on the unit.

Remote ID The unit's remote control ID setting (p.105)

TV Format The unit's video signal type (p.106)

Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.1(}5)

Tuner Freq. Step (Asia and General models only)

The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.106)

System ID System ID number

Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit

• If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, "!" (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of

the "Information" and "System" icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You

can update the unit's firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in "Updating

the unit's firmware via the network" (p.113).

@ Multi Zone

Displays information about Zone2.

Input Tile input source selected for Zone2

Volume The volume setting for Zone2

CONFIGURATIONS • Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) En104

Configurethesystemsettingsoftheunitwhileviewingthefrontdisplay.

Set the unit to standby mode.

While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE O.

MAIN ZONE

PROGRAM

Press PROGRAM to select an item.

Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.

Press MAIN ZONE _ to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on

again.

The new settings take effect.

ADVANCED SETUP menu items

i!ii!iiii!i_ii!ilii!ilil!iiii!iiii!ilii!iiil!iiii!iiii!ilii!ilil!iiii!iiii!ilii!ilil!iiii!iiii!ilii!iiil!iiii!iiii!ilii!ilil!iiii!iiii!ilii!ilil!iiii!iiii!ilii!iiil!iiii!iiii!ilii!ilil!iiii!iiii!iliii!i!ill_!!i:i_i_ii!_iiii_i!_i!ii!_!_ii!_!_ii!_!!ii!_!_ii!_!_!iii:!iiii:iiii_!_ii!_!!!iii:iiiii:iiii_!!ii!_!_!iii:iiiii:!ili_!_ii!_!_!iii:!iiii:iiii_!_ii!_!!!iii:iiiii:iiii_!!ii!_!_!iii:iiiii:!ili_!_ii!_!_!iii:!iiii:iiii_!_ii!_!!!iii:iiiii:iiii_!!ii!_!_!iii:iiiii:!ili_!_ii!_!_!iii:!iiii:iiii_!_ii!_!!!iii:iiiii:iiii_!!ii!_!_!iii:iiiii:!ili_!_ii!_!_!iii:!iiii:iiii_!_ii!_!!!iii:iiiii:iiii_!!ii!_!_!iii:iiiii:!ili_!_ii!_!_!iii:!iiii:iiii_!_ii!_!!!iii:iiiii:iiii_!!ii!_!_!iii:iiiii:!ili_!_ii!_!_!iii:!iiii:iiii_!_ii!_!!!iii:iiiii:iiii_!!ii!_!_!iii:iiiii:!ili_!_ii!_!_!iii:!iiii:iiii_!_ii!_!!!iii:iiiii:iiii_!!ii!_!_!iii:iiiii:!ili_!_ii!_!_!iii:!iiii:iiii_!_ii!_!!!iii:iiiii:iiii_!!ii!_!_!iii:iiiii:!ili_!_ii!_!_!iii:!iiii:iiii_!_ii!_!!!iii:iiiii:iiii_!!ii!_!_!iii:iiiii:!ili_!_ii!_!_!iii:!ii_i_!i_i!iii_i!ill_i!ili_i!iii_i!i!_!ill

SP IMR Changes the speaker impedance setting. 105

REMOTE ID Selects the unit's remote control ID. 105

TU (Asia and General models only) 106

Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.

TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 106

MON.CHK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 106

INIT Restores the default settings. 106

UPDATE Updates the firmware. 107

VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 107

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.)

Change the unit's speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the

speakers connected.

Settings

Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You

6 £-)MIN

can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the

8 £-)MIN (default) unit.

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTEID)

Change the unit's remote control ID so that it matches the remote control's ID (default:

ID1 ). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a

unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.

Settings

ID1 (default), ID2

Changing the remote control ID of the remote control

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be

automatically canceled.

Press CODE SET on the remote control.

2 Press RECEIVER.

3 Use the numeric keys to enter "5019" (ID1) or "5020" (ID2).

Once the remote control ID is registered successfully, SOURCE blinks twice.

If it blinks six times, registration failed. Repeat from Step 1.

• The registered remote control codes (p.108) are not cleared even if you change the remote control ID.

CONFIGURATIONS • Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En10S

Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU)

(Asia and General models only)

Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or

region.

Settings

Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz

FM100/AM10 steps and AM by 10-kHz steps.

Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps

FM50/AM9 (default) and AM by 9-kHz steps.

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output

(MON.CHK}

The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI

OUT jack.

Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in "Resolution"

(p.95) when the unit cannot detect the TV's resolution or when you want to specify a

different resolution than the detected resolution.

Settings

Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a

YES (default) resolution supported by the TV only.)

Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a

SKIP

specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)

Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.

Settings

NTSC, PAL

Default

U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC

Other models: PAL

• Reset to "YES" if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV

after "MON.CHK" has been set to "SKIP".

Restoring the default settings (INIT)

Restores the default settings for the unit.

Choices

VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations.

ALL Restores the default settings for the unit.

CANCEL Does not perform an initialization.

CONFIGURATIONS • Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En106

Updating the firmware (UPDATE)

New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be

released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from our website. If the unit is

connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details,

refer to the information supplied with updates.

Firmware update procedure

Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure

you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select "USB" or "NETWORK" and press INFO to

start firmware update.

Choices

USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device.

NETWORK Update the firmware via the network.

• If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after

ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit's firmware by following the procedure in

"Updating the unit's firmware via the network" (p.113).

Checking the firmware version (VERSION)

Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.

• You can also check the firmware version in "System" (p.104) in the "Information" menu.

• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.

CONFIGURATIONS • Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En107

SOURCE

operation keys

TV ©

You can use the unit's remote control to operate external devices

(such as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control

code of the external device.

• You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor.

• Ensure that the remote control ID of the external device is set to "ID1 ". If any other

ID is selected, the remote control operations may not work properly.

• If the unit's remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, the

registered codes may be cleared. If this happens, insert new batteries and register

the codes again.

• Under the unit's default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all

the input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI

Control-compatible devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This

function may not work depending on the specification of the external device.)

Registering the remote control code for a TV

You can use the unit's remote control to operate a TV if you have

registered its remote control code.

• You can also register your TV's remote control code to the unit's input selection

keys (p.109). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to

operate the TV (this function may not be available on some TV models).

• (RX-V775 [China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models] only)

You can also assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.110).

Use "Remote Control Code Search" in the CD-ROM

to find your TV's remote control code.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 2.

Press TV @.

Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote

control code.

Once the remote control code is successfully registered, SOURCE

blinks twice.

If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.

TV operations

Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you

can control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input

source selected on the unit.

TV operation keys

INPUT

MUTE

TV VOL

TV CH

TV ©

Switches the video inputs of the TV.

Mutes the audio output of the TV.

Adjust the volume of the TV.

Switch the channels of the TV

Turns on/off the TV.

• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list.

If that does not work, try the other codes.

Press CODE SET.

SOURCE blinks twice.

CONFIGURATIONS • Controlling external devices with the remote control En108

SOURCE

RECEIVER

)ut selection keys

Externaldevice

operation keys

Registering the remote control codes for

playback devices

You can use the unit's remote control to operate playback devices if

you have registered their remote control codes. You can also use

the input selection keys to change the playback devices that are

controlled by the remote control, because their remote control

codes are assigned to the input selection keys.

• (RX-V675 and RX-V775 [U.S.A. and Canada models] only)

If you assign the remote control code for an external device to the star (*) key, you

can operate the device with the remote control without switching the input source

after pressing the star key.

• (RX-V775 [China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models] only)

You can also assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.110).

Use "Remote Control Code Search" in the CD-ROM

to find the remote control code for your playback

device.

• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If

that does not work, try the other codes.

Press CODE SET.

SOURCE blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 2.

Press the input selection key.

For example, press HDMI 1 to set the remote control code

for the playback device connected to the HDMI 1 jack.

Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote

control code.

Once the remote control code is registered successfully, SOURCE

blinks twice.

If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.

• For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to

"Configuring scene assignments" (p.46).

Playback device operations

Once you have registered the remote control code for your

playback device, you can control it using the following keys after

selecting the input source or scene.

By pressing SOURCE or RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or

external device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and

numeric keys. You can operate the unit after pressing RECEIVER (lights up in

orange), and an external device after pressing SOURCE (lights up in green). For

example, if you register the remote control code of your external device on

TUNER, you can operate the unit's built-in FM/AM radio after pressing RECEIVER

and the external device after pressing SOURCE.

SOURCE d.b Turns on/off the playback device.

Cursor keys Select an item.

Menu operation ENTER Confirms a selected item.

keys

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

DISPLAY Switches information on the display.

TOP MENU Displays the top menu.

POP-UP/MENU Displays the pop-up menu.

m Stops playback.

n Stops playback temporarily.

External device I_- Starts playback of the selected

operation keys song/video.

Searches forward/backward (by

holding down).

Numeric keys

TV operation keys

Skips forward/backward.

Enter numerical values.

Control the TV (p.108).

• These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback

device and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control.

CONFIGURATIONS • Controlling external devices with the remote control En109

SOURCE O

SOURCE

operation keys

JMenu operation keys

Externaldevice

operation keys

TV O

Programming from other remote controls

(learning)

(RX-V775 [China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models] only)

The remote control of the unit can receive remote control signals

from other remote controls and learn the remote control operation. If

you cannot find a remote control code for your playback device or if

any key on the remote control does not work after you register the

remote control code, use the learning function to assign a function

to each key.

Press CODE SET.

SOURCE blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 1.

Press one of the following keys depending on the

type of your device.

For playback device: press the input selection key

(corresponding to the input jacks where the device is

connected).

For TV: press TV ©.

Use the numeric keys to enter "9990".

Aim the infrared transmitters of the remote controls

at each other.

Remotecontrol of external device

5 to 10 cm apart

Perform the following steps within 10 seconds.

(_) On this unit, press one of the following keys to which you want to

assign a function.

For playback device: SOURCE O, menu operations keys,

external device operation keys

For TV: TV operation keys

(_) On the external device, press the key from which the operation is

learned.

Once the operation is learned successfully, SOURCE blinks

twice.

If it blinks six times, learning has failed. Repeat Step 5.

Repeat step 5 until all desired operations are

learned.

"7 Press CODE SET.

SOURCE blinks once.

Not@

• If you press RECEIVER in step 2, you can assign functions of an external

receiver to the menu operation keys, external device operation keys or

numeric keys. However, it makes these keys to control the unit impossible. If

you need to restore the remote control code for the unit, perform the following

steps.

C!) Press CODE SET.

Press RECEIVER.

(9) Use the numeric keys to enter "9992".

CONFIGURATIONS • Controlling external devices with the remote control En1 10

SOURCE

)ut selection keys

Clearing functions learned from other

remote controls

(RX-V775 [China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models] only)

Clearing the assignment for each key

Press CODE SET.

SOURCE blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 1.

Press one of the following keys to select the device

for which key assignments will be cleared.

For playback device: press the input selection key.

For TV: press TV ©.

Use the numeric keys to enter "9991".

Press the key that you want to reset.

Once the key assignment is cleared successfully, SOURCE

blinks twice.

If it blinks six times, clearing failed. Repeat from Step 2.

Repeat step 4 until all desired key assignments are

cleared.

Press CODE SET.

SOURCE blinks once.

Clearing the assignments for each input

source

Press CODE SET.

SOURCE blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 1.

Press one of the following keys to select the device

for which key assignments will be cleared.

For playback device: press the input selection key.

For TV: press TV ©.

Use the numeric keys to enter "9992".

Once the key assignment is cleared successfully, SOURCE

blinks twice.

If it blinks six times, clearing failed. Repeat from Step 1.

CONFIGURATIONS • Controlling external devices with the remote control En1 11

SOURCE

)ut selection keys

Resetting remote control codes

You can reset a remote control code registered to each input

selection key.

Press CODE SET.

SOURCE blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 1.

Press the input selection key.

Use the numeric keys to enter "5098".

Once the remote control code is reset successfully, SOURCE blinks

twice.

If it blinks six times, resetting has failed. Repeat from Step 1.

"_;_reset th_ remote eor_tre_ to f_etory default setth[fs

(_) Press CODE SET,

(_) Press RECEIVER.

(_3)Use the numeric keys to enter "9981".

CONFIGURATIONS • Controlling external devices with the remote control En1 12

Newfirmwarethatprovidesadditionalfeaturesorproduct

improvementswillbereleasedasneeded.Iftheunitisconnected

totheInternet,youcandownloadthefirmwareviathenetworkand

updateit.

Note

• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during

firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more

(depending on your Internet connection speed).

• If the unit is connected to the wireless network via a wireless network adapter,

network update may not be possible depending on the condition of the

wireless connection. In this case, update the firmware using the USB memory

device (p.107).

3 If "Update Success Please Power Of!!" appears on

the front display, press MAIN ZONE _ on the front

panel.

The firmware update is complete.

• If you want to update the firmware later, select "CLOSE" in Step 2. "!" (exclamation

mark) appears at the upper right of the "Information" and "System" icons, and a

message will be displayed in the "System" screen (p.104). You can update the

unit's firmware by pressing ENTER in the "System" screen.

ENTER

• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the

"ADVANCED SETUP" menu (p.107).

A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed

after ON SCREEN is pressed.

Information

icon

Read the on-screen description.

To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to

select "START" and press ENTER.

The on-screen display turns off.

Message

System Icon

CONFIGURATIONS • Updating the unit's firmware via the network En113

APPENDIX

The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound

balance...

If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use "Auto Setup" to

optimize the speaker settings again (p.37). If you want to adjust the speaker settings

manually, use "Manual Setup" in the "Setup" menu (p.91).

Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the

volume control...

If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the

volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or

speakers. We recommend using "Max Volume" in the "Setup" menu to set the maximum

volume level for the unit in advance (p.95). You can also set the maximum volume for

Zone2 (p.lO0).

I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning

on the unit...

By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically

applied. If you want to fix the volume, use "Initial Volume" in the "Setup" menu to set the

volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.95). You can also set the initial

volume for Zone2 (p.100).

We are bothered by volume differences when switching

between input sources...

You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing "Input Trim" in

the "Option" menu (p.80).

I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at

all...

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.127). After

connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,

enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This

setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your

system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback

devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.

I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during

operations...

By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated

(such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you

when you are watching movies or sports, configure "Short Message" (p.100) in the

"Setup" menu to turn off the short messages.

I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...

You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by

utilizing "Memory Guard" in the "Setup" menu (p.102).

The unit's remote control is simultaneously controlling another

Yamaha product as well as the unit...

When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another

Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,

remote control (p. 105).

I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device

even when the unit is in standby mode...

If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output

videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in

standby mode. To use this function, set "Standby Through" (p.97) in the "Setup" menu

to "On". You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when

this function is enabled.

APPENDIX • Frequently asked questions En114

Refertothetablebelowwhentheunitdoesnotfunctionproperly.

Iftheproblemyouareexperiencingisnotlistedbeloworiftheinstructionsbelowdonothelp,turnofftheunit,disconnectthepowercable,andcontactthenearestauthorized

Yamahadealerorservicecenter.

First, check the following:

The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets

securely.

The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.

The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.

Power, system and remote control

The power does not turn on.

The protection circuitry has been activated three times

consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby

indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power.

The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric

The power does not turn off. shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop

in the power supply voltage.

The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.

The unit enters standby mode automatically.

The unit is not reacting.

The sleep timer worked.

The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used

for the specified time.

The speaker impedance setting is incorrect.

The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short

circuit.

The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric

shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop

in the power supply voltage.

As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your

nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.

Hold down MAIN ZONE _ on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to

initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable

from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and

speakers (p.20).

Turn on the unit and start playback again.

To disable the auto-standby function, set "Auto Power Standby" in the "Setup"

menu to "Off" (p.102).

Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.105).

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and

speakers (p.20).

Hold down MAIN ZONE _ on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to

initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable

from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)

APPENDIX • Troubleshooting En11S

The unit cannot be controlled using the remote

control.

External devices cannot be controlled using the

remote control.

The MHL-compatible mobile device cannot be

controlled using the remote control.

The remote control does not learn new functions.

(RX-V775 [China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models]

only)

The unit is out of the operating range.

The batteries are weak.

The unit's remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or

strong lighting.

The remote control is set to control external devices.

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not

identical.

The remote control is set to control the unit.

The corresponding remote control code is not set properly.

A remote control code for another playback device is assigned to

V-AUX.

The mobile device or its application is not externally controllable.

The batteries of the remote control of the unit and/or the external

device are weak.

The distance between the two remote controls is not appropriate.

The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not

compatible with the remote control.

Memory capacity is full.

Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5).

Replace with new batteries.

Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.

Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in

orange).

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.105).

Press SOURCE to set the remote control to control external devices (the key lights

up in green).

Set the remote control code again (p.108). Even if the remote control code is

registered properly, some products may not respond to the remote control.

Reset the remote control code registered to V-AUX (p.112).

Directly operate the mobile device itself.

Replace with new batteries.

Place the remote controls at a proper distance (p.11(}).

Learning is impossible in this case.

Clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for new functions

(p.111).

APPENDIX • Troubleshooting En116

Audio

No sound.

The volume cannot be increased.

No sound is coming from a specific speaker.

No sound is coming from the surround back

speaker.

No sound is coming from the subwoofer.

No sound from the playback device (connected to

the unit with HDMI).

Another input source is selected.

Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.

The maximum volume is set.

A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on.

The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel.

The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the

speaker.

Audio output of the speaker is disabled.

The volume of the speaker is set too low.

The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is

defective.

The speaker is malfunctioning.

The extended surround is disabled.

The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency

signals.

Subwoofer output is disabled.

The volume of the subwoofer is too low.

The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function.

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection).

The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from

the SPEAKERS terminals.

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds

the limit.

Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio

format of the input signal, use "Audio Signal" in the "Information" menu (p.104).

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

Use "Max Volume" in the "Setup" menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.95).

Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.

To check it, use "Audio Signal" in the "Information" menu (p.104).

To check it, use "Test Tone" in the "Setup" menu (p.94).

Perform "Auto Setup" (p.37) or use "Configuration" in the "Setup" menu to change

the speaker settings (p.91).

Perform "Auto Setup" (p.37) or use "Level" in the "Setup" menu to adjust the

speaker volume (p.93).

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.

To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be

malfunctioning.

Use "Extended Surround" in the "Option" menu to select a decoder to be used

(p.80),

To check it, set "Extra Bass" in the "Setup" menu to "On", in order to output the

front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.92).

Perform "Auto Setup" (p.37) or set "Subwoofer" in the "Setup" menu to "Use"

(p.92).

Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.

Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV's specifications.

In "Audio Output" in the "Setup" menu, set "Amp" to "On" (p.97).

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

APPENDIX • Troubleshooting En117

No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is

used).

Only the front speakers work on multichannel

audio.

Noise/hum is heard.

The sound is distorted.

The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.

A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with

an HDMI cable.

(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)

The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.

(If you are trying to use ARC)

ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.

The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as

PCM) only.

The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device.

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.

The volume of the unit is too high.

A device connected to the unit's output jacks is not turned on.

Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the

speakers connected to the unit.

Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.25).

Use "TV Audio Input" in the "Setup" menu to select the correct audio input jack

(p.96).

Set "ARC" in the "Setup" menu to "On" (p.97). Also, enable ARC on the TV.

To check it, use "Audio Signal" in the "Information" menu (p.104). If necessary,

change the digital audio output setting on the playback device.

Move the unit further away from the device.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

Turn down the volume. If "ECO Mode" is set to "On", set it to "Off" (p.102).

Turn on all devices connected to the unit's output jacks.

Video

....

No video.

No video from the playback device (connected to

the unit with HDMI).

The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV,

Another input source is selected on the unit.

Another input source is selected on the TV.

The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV.

The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is

defective.

The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection).

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over

the limit.

The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI.

Another input source is selected on the TV.

Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

Set "MON.CHK" in the "ADVANCED SETUP" menu to "YES" (p.106).

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use "Video

Signal" in the "Information" menu (p.104). For information about video signals

supported by the unit, see "HDMI signal compatibility" (p.128).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV's specifications.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with

an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.23 to 26).

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

APPENDIX • Troubleshooting En118

FM/AM radio

FM radio reception is weak or noisy.

There is multi-path interference.

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,

AM radio reception is weak or noisy, thermostats, or other electrical equipment.

Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

The AM radio signal is weak.

AM radio stations cannot be registered as Auto Preset has been used.

presets.

Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.

Set "FM Mode" in the "Option" menu to "Mono" to select monaural FM radio

reception (p.80).

Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element

antenna.

It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor

AM antenna.

Select the station manually (p.53).

Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element

antenna.

Adjust the AM antenna orientation.

Select the station manually (p.53).

Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with

the supplied AM antenna.

Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations

manually (p.54).

APPENDIX • Troubleshooting En119

USB and network

The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely.

The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32.

The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption.

Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.

Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.

The unit does not detect the USB device.

Folders and files in the USB device cannot be Use a USB device without an encryption function.

viewed.

Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set "DHCP" in the "Setup"

The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained menu to "On" on the unit (p.98). If you want to configure the network parameters

The network feature does not function.

properly, manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other

network devices in your network (p.98).

Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music

contents are shared (p.65).

The media sharing setting is not correct.

Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.

of the unit to your PC.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the

The unit and PC are not in the same network.

unit and the PC to the same network.

The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.

The unit does not detect the PC.

The files In the PC cannot be viewed or played

back. The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.

The Internet radio cannot be played.

The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.

The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting

silence.

Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your

network devices (such as the router).

The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.

The application for smartphone/tablet "AV

Controller" does not detect the unit.

The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.

It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network.

In "MAC Address Filter" in the "Setup" menu, disable the MAC address filter or

specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.98).

Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For

information about the file formats supported by the unit, see "Playing back music

stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)" (p.65).

There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have

been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.

Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try

the station later or select another station.

Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be

played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.

The port number varies depending on the radio station.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the

unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network.

In "MAC Address Filter" in the "Setup" menu, disable the MAC address filter or

specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the

unit (p.98).

Firmware update via the network is failed. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.107).

APPENDIX • Troubleshooting En120

!!i!_ifill_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_!!!_i_,!!!!!¸!!!_i_i_iiiii::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::!!!!_1!!!!!_i;!_i_i!iiiiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_iiiii_ilili_iilli_iiiii_

Access denied

Access error

Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared

(p.65).

Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.

Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.58).

Make sure your router and modem are turned on.

Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.33).

Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.

Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

Access to the PC is denied.

The unit cannot access the USB device.

The unit cannot access the iPod.

The connected iPod is not supported by the unit.

There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.

The speaker cables short circuit.

An internal error has occurred.

An overcurrent is flowing through the MHL-compatible mobile

device.

There are no playable files in the selected folder.

The unit cannot detect the USB device.

The unit cannot detect the iPod.

The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not

identical.

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some

reason.

Check SP Wires

Internal Error

MHL Overloaded Turn off the unit and check the connection between the unit and mobile device.

No content Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.

Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

No device

Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.

Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn

Please wait it on again.

RemlD Mismatch Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.105).

Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be

defective.

Unable to play Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some formats supported by the unit, see "Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)" (p.65). If

reason, the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with

heavy traffic.

USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again.

APPENDIX • Error indications on the front display En121

Usethisdiagramasaguide.Youdonotneedtoadjustthespeakerlayouttothefollowingdiagramexactly.

0.5tolm i 0.5tolm

Turn it slightly inward to

reduce wall reflections.

i1.8m

(5.9 ft)

f.8mi

(5.9 ft) i

0.3 m (1 ft) or more

Turn it slightly inward to

reduce wall reflections.

Front speaker (L)

Front speaker (R)

Center speaker

Surround speaker (L)

Surround speaker (R)

Surround back speaker (L)

Surround back speaker (R)

Presence speaker (L)

Presence speaker (R)

Subwoofer

APPENDIX • Ideal speaker layout En122

Audio information

Audio decoding format

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports

5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

Dolby Digital EX

Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby

Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound.

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports

7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems

that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:

"Music mode" for music sources, "Movie mode" for movie sources, and "Game mode" for game sources.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three

modes available: "Music mode" for music sources, "Movie mode" for movie sources and "Game mode" for

game sources (for 2-channel sources only).

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is an advanced Iossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a

high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to

eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This

technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This

format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital

Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.

DTS Digital Surround

DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports

5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

DTS-ES

DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This

decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a

surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a

discrete surround back channel is recorded.

DTS Express

DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher

compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is

developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports

7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the

existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on

BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced Iossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home

theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to

eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This

technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS Neo:6

DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: "Music

mode" for music sources and "Cinema mode" for movie sources. This technology provides discrete

full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.

DSD (Direct Stream Digital)

DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super

Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest

frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology

offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.

FLAC

FLAC is a file format for Iossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to Iossy compressed audio

formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.

MP3

One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this

compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data

quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

MPEG-4 AAC

An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming

services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality

than MP3.

PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)

PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This

technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a Iossless audio format called

Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).

APPENDIX • Glossary En123

Sampling frequency/Quantization bit

Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal

is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: "48 kHz/24-bit".

• Sampling frequency

Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.

When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.

• Quantization bit

The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a

numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more

accurate.

WAV

Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by

converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other

compression methods.

WMA (Windows Media Audio)

One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic

technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of

compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

Others

Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)

A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification

connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a

consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.

LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel

This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This

channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio

effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.

Lip sync

Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an

increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag

between audio and video output.

HDMI and video information

Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and

the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because

each of these signals is independent.

Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined

and transmitted with a single cable.

Deep Color

Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available

colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems

process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology

allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate

on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.

HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video

signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable

without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a

secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at

"htt p://www, h d mi.org/".

MHL

MHL (Mobile High-definition Link) is the interface standard for high-speed digital video signal transmission

that is developed for mobile devices. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals

from mobile devices (such as smartphones) using a single cable with any loss. As with HDMI, MHL

complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection).

x.v.Color

"x.v.Color" is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than

sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with

the color gamut of sRGB standards, "x.v.Color" expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,

natural images.

APPENDIX • Glossary En124

Yamaha technologies

CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is

best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions

(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are

differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,

Yamaha's original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own

home.

CINEMA DSP 3D

The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA

DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the

accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.

Compressed Music Enhancer

The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music

formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound

system.

SILENT CINEMA

Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for

headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound

programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

Virtual CINEMA DSP

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with

front leff and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic

sound field in a listening room.

Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)

Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without

front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D

sound field in your room.

APPENDIX • Glossary En125

Video signal flow

Video signals input from a video device to the unit are

output to a TV as shown below.

@ Video conversion table

• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in "Video Mode" (p.95) in the "Setup" menu•

• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-1inevideo signals interchangeably•

Video device The unit

_j,,__.

:®Jl

.....

HDMI in HDMI out

COMPONENT _OMPONENT

VlDE(3 in I I VlDEOout

,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,111,_ _ _ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,111,_ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,111,_

: Available

APPENDIX • Glossary En126

HDMI Control

HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that

supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as

power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback

devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with

an HDMI cable.

For details on connections, see "Connecting a TV" (p.23) and "Connecting video

devices (such as BD/DVD players)" (p.28).

Operations available from the TV's remote control

• Standby synchronization

• Volume control including mute

• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner

• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device

• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)

(Example)

HDMI Control HDMI Control

Playbackdevice The unit turns off

also turns off (standby) iTur n off the TV

Operations available from the unit's remote control

• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene

selection (p.46)

• Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)

• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering

remote control codes (p.109)

(Example)

HDMI Control HDMI Control

Playback starts

,_Press SCENE (BD/DVD)

Turns on and displays

video from the playback

device

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after

connecting the TV and playback devices.

• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.

Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.

Enable HDMI Control on the unit, TV, and playback devices (such as

HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players).

To enable HDMI Control on the unit, set "HDMI Control" (p.96) in the "Setup"

menu to "On" and configure the related items ("TV Audio Input", "ARC", and

"Standby Sync").

Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and

playback devices.

Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

Check the followings.

On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected.

If not, select the input source manually.

On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

APPENDIX • Information on HDMI En127

Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning

off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

HDMI signal compatibility

Audio signals

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 2 and plugging in the TV again in

Step 3. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices

exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.

• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV's power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on

the TV.

• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works

more effectively.

2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio

DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),

Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit

HD DVD

DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD

Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video

Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,

Bitstream DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD

BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD

(High definition audio) High Resolution Audio, DTS

Express

Video signals

The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:

• VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• 480p/60 Hz • 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• 576p/50 Hz

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending

on the type of the DVD player.

• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVl devices. For details, refer to the instruction

manual for each device.

• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device

outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).

For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.

APPENDIX • Information on HDMI En128

[_ DOLBY

TRUEND

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D

symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Hi::lnll

HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of

HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.

@dt -uD

MasterAudio

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872;

7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the

Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a

trademark of DTS, Inc.

"Made for iPod," "Made for iPhone," and "Made for iPad" mean that an electronic accessory has been

designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the

developer to meet Apple performance standards.

Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory

standards.

Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance.

AirPlay, the AirPlay logo, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,

registered in the U.S. and other countries.

NNmm||||

Fraunhofer Institut

Integrierte Schaltungen

MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

work

This receiver supports network connections.

MHL and the MHL logo are a trademark, registered trademark or service mark of MHL, LLC in the United

States and/or other countries.

x.v.Color TM

"x.v.Color" is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

SILENT T_

CINEMA

"SILENT CINEMA" is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

DLNA TM and DLNA CERTIFIED TM are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network

Windows TM

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.

Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or

trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Android TM

Android is a trademark of Google Inc.

APPENDIX • Trademarks En129

Input jacks

• Analog Audio

[RX-V775]

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

Audio x 4 (AV 5-6, AUDIO 1-2)

[Other models]

Audio x 5 (AV 5-6, AUDIO 1-2, PHONO)

[RX-V675]

Audio x 4 (AV 5-6, AUDIO 1-2)

• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)

Optical x 2 (AV 1, AV 4)

Coaxial x 2 (AV 2-3)

• Video

Composite x 5 (AV 3-6, VIDEO [Front Panel])

Component x 2 (AV 1-2)

• HDMI Input

HDMI x 6 (HDMI 1-5, V-AUX*)

* V-AUX: MHL input compatible

• Other

USB x 1 (USB2.0)

NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)

Output jacks

• Analog Audio

[RX-V775]

- Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER,

SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R .1 , EXTRA SP L/R.2)

"1 Note: Assignment is possible [SURROUND BACK,

BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]

*2 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, PRESENCE]

- Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

SURROUND BACK L/R)

- Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1-2, mono)

- AV OUT x 1

- ZONE2 OUT x 1

- Headphone x 1

[RX-V675]

- Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER,

SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R .1 , EXTRA SP L/R.2)

"1 Note: Assignment is possible [SURROUND BACK,

BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]

*2 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, PRESENCE]

- Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1-2, mono)

- AV OUT x 1

- ZONE2 OUT x 1

- Headphone x 1

• Video

MONITOR OUT

- Component x 1

- Composite x 1

AV OUT

- Composite x 1

• HDMI Output

[RX-V775]

HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1-2)

[RX-V675]

HDMI OUT x 1

Other jacks

• YPAOMICx 1

• REMOTE IN x 1

• REMOTE OUT x 1

• TRIGGER OUT x 1

• DC OUT x 1

HDMI

• HDMI features: Deep Color, "x.v.Color," Auto Lip Sync, ARC

(Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K

• Video Format (Repeater Mode)

VGA

480i/60 Hz

576i/50 Hz

480p/60 Hz

576p/50 Hz

720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• Audio Format

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS Express

DTS

DSD 2-ch to 6-ch

PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)

• Content Protection: HDCP compatible

• Link Function: CEC supported

APPENDIX • Specifications En130

MHL

• Video Format (Repeater Mode)

VGA

480i/60 Hz

576i/50 Hz

480p/60 Hz

576p/50 Hz

720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

1080p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• Audio Format

- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)

• Current Supply Capacity: 1.0 A

TUNER

• Analog Tuner

[U.K. and Europe models]

FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)

[Other models]

FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)

USB

• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory

• Current Supply Capacity: 2.1 A

Network

• PC Client Function

• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5

• AirPlay supported

• Internet Radio

Compatible Decoding Formats

• Decoding Format

- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus

- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX

- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,

DTS Express

- DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1

- DTS Digital Surround

• Post Decoding Format

- Dolby Pro Logic

- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,

Dolby Pro Logic II Game

- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game

- DTS Nee:6 Music, DTS Nee:6 Cinema

Audio Section

• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)

[RX-V775]

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 8 _)

Front L/R ................................................................. 95 W+95 W

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 _)

Front L/R ............................................................. 110 W+110 W

Center .............................................................................. 110 W

Surround L/R ...................................................... 110 W+110 W

Surround Back L/R ............................................. 110 W+110 W

[RX-V675]

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 8 _)

Front L/R ................................................................. 90 W+90 W

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 _)

Front L/R ............................................................. 105 W+105 W

Center .............................................................................. 105 W

Surround L/R ...................................................... 105 W+105 W

Surround Back L/R ............................................. 105 W+105 W

• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)

[RX-V775]

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 _)

Front L/R ..................................................................... 130 W/ch

Center ....................................................................... 130 W/ch

Surround L/R .............................................................. 130 W/ch

Surround Back L/R ..................................................... 130 W/ch

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 _)

Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models] .......................... 160 W/ch

[RX-V675]

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 _)

Front L/R ..................................................................... 125 W/ch

Center ....................................................................... 125 W/ch

Surround L/R .............................................................. 125 W/ch

Surround Back L/R ..................................................... 125 W/ch

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 _)

Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models] .......................... 150 W/ch

• Maximum Effective Output Power (JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 _-))

[China, Korea, Asia and General models]

[RX-V775]

Front L/R ..................................................................... 160 W/ch

Center ........................................................................ 160 W/ch

Surround L/R .............................................................. 160 W/ch

Surround Back L/R ..................................................... 160 W/ch

[RX-V675]

Front L/R ..................................................................... 150 W/ch

Center ........................................................................ 150 W/ch

Surround L/R .............................................................. 150 W/ch

Surround Back L/R ..................................................... 150 W/ch

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

[RX-V775]

Front L!R (8/6/4/2 _) .................................. 140/180/210/250 W

[RX-V675]

Front L!R (8/6/4/2 _) .................................. 130/170/200/240 W

• Damping Factor

Front L/R, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 _ ............................. 100 or more

APPENDIX • Specifications En131

• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance

[RX-V775]

PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 _)

[Except for U.S.A. and Canada models] ............. 3.5 mV/47 k_

AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 _) .............................. 200 mV/47 k_

[RX-V675]

AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 _) .............................. 200 mV/47 k_

• Maximum Input Signal

[RX-V775]

PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD)

[Except for U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................ 60 mV

AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ........................... 2.3 V

[RX-V675]

AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ........................... 2.3 V

• Output Level / Output Impedance

[RX-V775]

AV OUT .............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 k_

PRE OUT ................................................................... 1 V/1.2 k_

SUBWOOFER ........................................................... 1 V/1.2 k_

ZONE2 OUT ....................................................... 200 mV/1.2 k_

[RX-V675]

AV OUT .............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 k_

SUBWOOFER ........................................................... 1 V/1.2 k_

ZONE2 OUT ....................................................... 200 mV/1.2 k_

• Headphone Jack Rated Output / Impedance

AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 _) ............................. 100 mV/560 _

• Frequency Response

AV 5 etc. to Front (10 Hz to 100 kHz) ......................... +0/-3 dB

• RIAA Equalization Deviation

[RX-V775]

PHONO

[Except for U.S.A. and Canada models] .................... 0_+0.5 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

[RX-V775]

PHONO to AV OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V)

[Except for U.S.A. and Canada models] ............. 0.02% or less

AV 5 etc. to Front (Pure Direct)

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 _) ............................... 0.06% or less

[RX-V675]

AV 5 etc. to Front (Pure Direct)

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 _) ............................... 0.06% or less

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

[RX-V775]

PHONO (Input Shorted 5 mV, AV OUT)

[Except for U.S.A. and Canada models] ............ 81 dB or more

AV 5 etc. (Input Shorted 250 mV, Speaker Out)

......................................................................... 100 dB or more

[RX-V675]

AV 5 etc. (Input Shorted 250 mV, Speaker Out)

......................................................................... 100 dB or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Front L/R (Speaker Out) ..................................... 150 pV or less

• Channel Separation

[RX-V775]

PHONO (Input Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)

[Except for U.S.A. and Canada models]

................................................................ 60 dB/55 dB or more

AV 5 etc. (Input 5.1 k_ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)

................................................................ 60 dB/45 dB or more

[RX-V675]

AV 5 etc. (Input 5.1 k_ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)

................................................................ 60 dB/45 dB or more

• Volume Control

Range ............................................. MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB

Step ................................................................................ 0.5 dB

• Tone Control Characteristics

Bass Boost/Cut ............................. _+6dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz

Bass Turnover ............................................................... 350 Hz

Treble Boost/Cut .......................... _+6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz

Treble Turnover .............................................................. 3.5 kHz

• Filter Characteristics

(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)

H.RR (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back) ....... 12 dB/oct.

L.P.R (Subwoofer) ..................................................... 24 dB/oct.

Video Section

• Video Signal Type

[U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] ................ NTSC

[Other models] .................................................................... PAL

• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) ..................... NTSC/PAL

• Video Signal Level

Composite .............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 _-)

Component

Y .......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 _

Pb/Pr ................................................................ 0.7 Vp-p/75 O

• Video Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)

....................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more

• Video Signal to Noise Ratio ................................ 50 dB or more

• Monitor Out Frequency Response (Video Conversion Off)

Component ............................................ 5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB

FM Section

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ....................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Asia and General models]

...................................... 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz

[Other models] ................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)

Mono ................................................................. 3 yV (20.8 dBf)

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono ................................................................................ 71 dB

Stereo ............................................................................... 69 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)

Mono ................................................................................. 0.3%

Stereo ................................................................................ 0.5%

• Antenna Input ................................................ 75 _ unbalanced

APPENDIX • Specifications En132

AM section

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... 530 to 1710 kHz

[Asia and General models] ...... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz

[Other models] ......................................... 531 kHz to 1611 kHz

General

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[General model] ............ AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

[China model] ................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz

[Korea model] ................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model] ............................................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz

[U.K. and Europe models] .............................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz

[Asia model] ................................... AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. 400 W/500 VA

[China, Asia and General models] ................................. 270 W

[Other models] ................................................................ 300 W

• Standby Power Consumption

HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. 0.10 W or less

[Other models] .................................................... 0.15 W or less

HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals)

................................................................................. 3 W or less

Network Standby On ............................................... 3 W or less

• Maximum Power Consumption

[Asia and General models] ............................................. 590 W

• Dimensions (W x H x D)

[RX-V775] ..... 435 x 171 x 368 mm (17-1/8" x 6-3/4" x 14-1/2")

[RX-V675] ..... 435 x 171 x 364 mm (17-1/8" x 6-3/4" x 14-3/8")

* Including legs and protrusions

• Weight

[RX-V775] ..................................................... 10.5 kg (23.2 Ibs)

[RX-V675] ..................................................... 10.0 kg (22.1 Ibs)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

APPENDIX • Specifications En133

Symbols

* keys 13

Exclamation mark (!) 104, 113

Lock icon (li_l) 102

Numerics

16:9 Normal (Aspect, Setup menu) 96

2.1-channel system 17

2ch Stereo (sound program) 50

3.1-channel system 17

4.1-channel system 17

4K signal (video signal resolution) 128

5.1-channel system 17

5ch BI-AMP (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu)

6.1-channel system 16, 20

7.1+2-channel system 16, 19

7.1-channel system 16, 19, 20

7ch +1ZONE (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu)

7ch Stereo (sound program) 50

Access denied (error indication) 121

Access error (error indication) 121

Action Game (sound program) 49

Adaptive DRC (Option menu) 79

Adaptive DSP Level (Sound, Setup menu) 95

Adjustment (Lipsync, Setup menu) 94

ADVANCED SETUP menu 105

Adventure (sound program) 49

AirPlay 70

AM antenna connection 32

AM radio listening 53

Amp (Audio Output, Setup menu) 97

ARC (Audio Return Channel) 23

ARC (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 97

Aspect (Video Mode, Setup menu) 96

Audio Decoder (front display information) 77

Audio device connection 31

Audio file format (PC/NAS) 65

Audio file format (USB storage device) 62

Audio In (Input menu) 82

AUDIO jack 22

Audio Output (HDMI, Setup menu) 97

Audio Return Channel (ARC) 23

Audio Signal (Information menu) 104

Auto Power Standby (ECO, Setup menu) 102

Auto Preset (FM radio) 57

Auto Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 37

Auto/Manual Select (Lipsync, Setup menu) 94

Automatic speaker setting optimization 37

Automatic station preset (FM radio) 57

AutoPowerStdby (ECO, Setup menu) 102

AVOUTjack 11, 12

Banana plug 20

Basic playback operation 45

Bass (Tone Control, Option menu) 79

Bass Cross Over (Speaker, Setup menu) 92

Bi-amp speaker connection 21

Bitrate (Audio Signal, Information menu) 104

Bitstream 128

CAT-5 cable 33

Cellar Club (sound program) 50

Center (Speaker, Setup menu) 91

Center Image (Sound Program menu) 87

Center Width (Sound Program menu) 87

Chamber (sound program) 50

Channel (Audio Signal, Information menu)

Check SP Wires (error indication) 121

Check Sur_ (YPAO error message) 43

CINEMA DSP3D 48

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (Option menu) 79

CLASSICAL (sound program subcategory)

1O4

Clear Preset (FM/AM radio) 57

Clearing (remote control) 111

Clock Time (Radio Data System) 55

COAXIAL jack 22

Component video cable 22

Component video connection (video device)

COMPONENT VIDEO jack 22

Composite video connection (video device)

Compressed Music Enhancer 52

Configuration (Speaker, Setup menu) 91

Crossover frequency setting 92

Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 37

DC OUT (Function, Setup menu) 101

DCOUTjack 11, 12

Decode Type (Sound Program menu) 86

Decoder Mode (Input menu) 82

Decoder Off (front display information) 77

Default Gateway (IP Address, Setup menu) 98

Default Gateway (Network, Information menu) 104

Default setting restoration 106

Delay Enable (Lipsync, Setup menu) 94

Detail (Load, Scene menu) 84

Device Control (Load, Scene menu) 84

DHCP (IP Address, Setup menu) 98

Dialog Adjust (Option menu) 79

Dialog Lift (Dialog Adjust, Option menu) 79

Dialog Lvl (Dialog Adjust, Option menu) 79

Dialogue (Audio Signal, Information menu) 104

Dialogue Adjust (Option menu) 79

Dialogue Level (Dialogue Adjust, Option menu) 79

Dialogue Lift (Dialogue Adjust, Option menu) 79

Dialogue normalization level 104

Digital coaxial cable 22

Digital Media Controller (DMC) 83

Digital optical cable 22

Dimension (Sound Program menu) 87

APPENDIX • Index

Dimmer(FrontDisplay)(DisplaySet,Setupmenu)100

Direct(SoundProgrammenu)87

DirectStreamDigital(DSD)123

DISPLAYkey 13

DisplaySet(Function,Setupmenu)100

Distance(Speaker,Setupmenu)93

Distance(YPAOmeasurementresult)42

DLNA65

DMC(DigitalMediaController)83

DMCControl(Inputmenu)83

DNSServer(IPAddress,Setupmenu)98

DNSServer(Network,Informationmenu)104

DolbyDigitalEX(ExtendedSurround)80

DolbyProLogic(surrounddecoder)51

DolbyProLogicIIGame(surrounddecoder)51

DolbyProLogicIIMovie(surrounddecoder)51

DolbyProLogicIIMusic(surrounddecoder)51

DolbyProLogicIIxGame(surrounddecoder)51

DolbyProLogicIIxMovie(ExtendedSurround)80

DolbyProLogicIIxMovie(surrounddecoder)51

DolbyProLogicIIxMusic(ExtendedSurround)80

DolbyProLogicIIxMusic(surrounddecoder)51

Drama(soundprogram)49

DSD(DirectStreamDigital)123

DSPLevel(SoundProgrammenu)86

DSPProgram(frontdisplayinformation)77

DTSNeo:6Cinema(surrounddecoder)51

DTSNeo:6Music(surrounddecoder)51

DTS-ES(ExtendedSurround)80

DynamicRange(Sound,Setupmenu)94

ECO (Setup menu) 102

ECO Mode (ECO, Setup menu) 102

Enhancer (Option menu) 80

ENHANCER (sound mode) 52

ENTERTAINMENT (sound program subcategory) 49

Error indication (front display) 121

EX/ES (Extended Surround, Option menu) 80

EXTD Surround (Option menu) 80

Extended Surround (Option menu) 80

External device control (remote control) 108

External device operation key (remote control) 13

External power amplifier 34

Extra Bass (Speaker, Setup menu) 92

Filter (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 98

Firmware update 107

Firmware update (network) 107, 113

Firmware update (USB) 107

Firmware Version (System, Information menu) 104

Firmware version check 107

FM antenna connection 32

FM Mode (Option menu) 80

FM radio listening 53

FM/AM radio tuning 53

Format (Audio Signal, Information menu) 104

Frequency (FM/AM radio) 53

Frequency step setting 53, 106

Front (Speaker, Setup menu) 91

Front / Rear Balance (Sound Program menu) 87

Front display (part names and functions) 10

Front display brightness 100

Front display information 77

Front panel (part names and functions) 8, 9

Front panel jack connection 31

Front Presence (Speaker, Setup menu) 92

Function (Setup menu) 100

GND terminal 31

Ground lead 31

Hall in Munich (sound program) 50

Hall in Vienna (sound program) 50

HDMI (Setup menu) 96

HDMI cable 22

HDMI connection (video device) 28

HDMI Control (HDMI, Setup menu) 96

HDMI jack 22

HDMI Monitor (Information menu) 104

HDMI OUT (Audio Output, Setup menu) 97

HDMI OUT1 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 97

HDMI OUT2 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 97

HDMI output selection 45

HDMI signal compatibility 128

Headphones 48

Height Balance (Sound Program menu) 87

High definition audio 128

High speed HDMI cable 22

In.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 80

Indicator (part names and functions) 10

INFO key 8, 9, 13

Information display (front display) 10

Information menu 103

Information switching (front display) 77

INIT (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 106

Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 86

Initial Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 95

Initial Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 100

Input (Audio Signal, Information menu) 104

Input (front display information) 77

Input menu 81

Input selection key (remote control) 13

Input Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 80

Internal Error (error indication) 121

Internal Error (YPAO error message) 43

Internet radio listening 68

IP Address (Network, Information menu) 104

IP Address (Network, Setup menu) 98

iPod charge 58

iPod connection 58

iPod content playback 59

iPod content playback (AirPlay) 70

iTunes content playback (AirPlay) 70

Language (Setup menu) 103

APPENDIX • Index En13S

Learning(remotecontrol)110

Left/ Right Balance (Sound Program menu) 87

Level (Sound Program menu) 87

Level (Speaker, Setup menu) 93

Level (YPAO measurement result) 42

Level Error (YPAO warning message) 44

LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 124

Lipsync 124

Lipsync (Sound, Setup menu) 94

LIVE/CLUB (sound program subcategory) 50

Liveness (Sound Program menu) 86

Load (Scene menu) 84

Low Frequency Effects (LFE) 124

MAC Address (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu)

MAC Address (Network, Information menu) 104

MAC Address Filter (Network, Setup menu) 98

Main Zone Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 99

Manual Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 91

Manual speaker configuration 91

Manual station preset (FM/AM radio) 54

Max Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 95

Max Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 100

Measurement result (YPAO) 41

Media sharing setup 65

Memory Guard (Function, Setup menu) 102

Menu language selection 36

Menu operation key (remote control) 13

MHL cable 22

MHL connection 32

MHL jack 22

MHL Overloaded (error indication) 121

MHL-compatible mobile device 32

MODE key 13

MON.CHK (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 106

Monaural Mix (Sound Program menu) 87

Monaural reception (FM radio) 53

Monitor check 106

Mono Movie (sound program) 49

MOVIE (sound program category) 49

MOVIE THEATER (sound program subcategory) 49

Multi measurement (YPAO) 40

Multi Zone (Information menu) 104

Multi Zone (Setup menu) 99

Multiple room playback 72

Multi-zone 72

MUSIC (sound program category) 50

Music Video (sound program) 49

MUTE key 13

Muting 45

NAS (Network Attached Storage) 33

NAS connection 33

NAS content playback 65

Network (Information menu) 104

Network (Setup menu) 98

Network Attached Storage (NAS) 33

Network cable 33

Network connection 33

Network information 104

Network Name (Network, Information menu) 104

Network Name (Network, Setup menu) 99

Network Standby (Network, Setup menu) 98

No content (error indication) 121

No device (error indication) 121

No F.PRNS SP (YPAO error message) 43

No Front SP (YPAO error message) 43

No MIC (YPAO error message) 43

No Signal (YPAO error message) 43

No Sur. SP (YPAO error message) 43

Noisy (YPAO error message) 43

Normal (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) 42

NTSC (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 106

Numeric key (remote control) 13

ON SCREEN key 13

OPTICAL jack 22

OPTION key 13

Option menu 78

Out of Phase (YPAO warning message) 44

Output (Audio Signal, Information menu) 104

Over Distance (YPAO warning message) 44

PAL (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu)

Panorama (Sound Program menu) 87

Parametric EQ (Speaker, Setup menu) 93

PARTY key 13

Party mode 76

Party Mode Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu)

PC connection 33

PC content playback 65

PHONES jack 8, 9

PHONOjack 11

Playback device connection 28

Playback device operation (remote control)

Please wait (error indication) 121

Power Amp Assign (Speaker, Setup menu)

Power cable connection 35

Power management 102

Power Mode (DC OUT, Setup menu) 101

PRE OUT jack 11

Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 54

Program Service (Radio Data System) 55

Program Type (Radio Data System) 55

Pure Direct 52

PURE DIRECT (sound mode) 52

100

109

Q factor 93

Radio Data System (FM radio) 55

Radio Data System information 55

Radio Data System tuning 55

Radio Text (Radio Data System) 55

Rear panel (part names and functions)

Recording device connection 34

RemlD Mismatch (error indication) 121

11, 12

106

APPENDIX • Index E,,135

Remote connection 74

Remote control {part names and functions) 13

Remote control code registration

(playback device) 109

Remote control code registration (TV) 108

Remote Control Code Search 108, 109

Remote control ID setting 105

Remote control ID setting (remote control) 105

Remote control sensor 8, 9

Remote control signal transmitter (remote control)

REMOTE ID (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 105

Remote ID {System, information menu) 104

REMOTE IN jack 11, 12

REMOTE OUT jack 11, 12

Rename (input name) 82

Rename (network name) 99

Rename {scene name) 85

Rename/Icon Select (Input menu) 82

Rename/Icon Select (Scene menu) 85

Repeat (iPod, Option menu) 61

Repeat (PC/NAS, Option menu) 67

Repeat (USB storage device, Option menu) 64

Reset (remote control) 112

Reset (Scene menu) 85

Resolution (Video Mode, Setup menu) 95

Reverb Delay (Sound Program menu) 87

Reverb Level {Sound Program menu) 87

Reverb Time (Sound Program menu) 87

Reverse (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) 42

Roleplaying Game (sound program) 49

Room Size (Sound Program menu) 86

Router connection 33

Sampling (Audio Signal, Information menu)

Save (Scene menu) 84

SBR _ SBL (YPAO error message) 43

Scene configuration 46

SCENE function 46

SCENE link playback 46

104

Scene menu 83

Sci-Fi {sound program) 49

Setup menu 88

Short Message (Display Set, Setup menu) 100

Shuffle (iPod, Option menu) 61

Shuffle (PC/NAS. Option menu) 67

Shuffle (USB storage device, Option menu) 64

Signal information 104

SILENT CINEMA 48

Simple play (iPod) 60

Single measurement (YPAO) 39

Size (YPAO measurement result) 42

SLEEP key 13

Sleep timer 13

Sleep timer (Zone2) 75

Sound (Setup menu) 94

Sound field effect 48

Sound mode selection 47

Sound program 49, 50

Sound Program menu 85

SP IMP. (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 105

Speaker {Setup menu) 91

Speaker cable connection 20

Speaker connection 19

Speaker impedance 15

Speaker Impedance (System, Information menu)

Speaker impedance setting 18, 105

Speaker indicator (front display) 10

Speaker placement 15

Spectacle (sound program) 49

Sports (sound program) 49

Standard (sound program) 49

Standby indicator (front panel) 8, 9

Standby Sync (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 97

Standby Through (HDMI, Setup menu) 97

Station preset (FM/AM radio) 54

Status (Network, Information menu) 104

STEREO (sound program subcategory) 50

Stereo pin cable (RCA cable) 22

Stereo reception (FM radio) 53

104

STP network cable 33

STRAIGHT {sound mode) 51

Straight decode 51

Subnet Mask (IP Address, Setup menu) 98

Subnet Mask (Network, Information menu) 104

Subwoofer (Speaker, Setup menu) 92

Subwoofer connection 21

Subwoofer Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 80

SUR.DECODE (sound mode) 51

Surround (Speaker, Setup menu) 91

Surround Back (Speaker, Setup menu) 92

Surround Back Initial Delay {Sound Program menu) 86

Surround Back Liveness (Sound Program menu) 86

Surround Back Room Size (Sound Program menu) 86

Surround decoder 51

Surround Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 86

Surround Liveness {Sound Program menu) 86

Surround Room Size (Sound Program menu) 86

SW.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 80

System (Information menu) 104

System ID (System, Information menu) 104

Target Zone (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 101

Test Tone {Speaker, Setup menu) 94

The Bottom Line (sound program) 50

The RoxyTheatre (sound program) 50

Tone Control (Option menu) 79

TONE CONTROL key 8, 9

TP {Traffic Program) 55

Traffic information (Radio Data System) 55

Traffic Program (FM radio, Option menu) 55

Treble (Tone Control, Option menu) 79

Trigger function 35

Trigger Mode {Trigger Output, Setup menu) 101

TRIGGER OUT jack 11, 12

Trigger Output (Function, Setup menu) 101

TU (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 106

Tuner Freq. Step (System, Information menu) 104

Turntable connection 31

APPENDIX • Index E_137

TVAudioInput(HDMIControl,Setupmenu)96

TVconnection23

TVconnection(ARC-compatibleTV) 23

TVconnection(HDMIControl-compatibleTV)25

TVconnection(TVwithHDMIinputjacks)26

TVconnection(TVwithoutHDMIinputjacks)27

TVFORMAT(ADVANCEDSETUPmenu)106

TVFormat(System,Informationmenu)104

TVoperation(remotecontrol)108

TVoperationkey(remotecontrol)13

Unable to play (error indication) 121

UPDATE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 107

USBjack 8, 9

USB mass storage class device 62

USB Overloaded (error indication) 121

USB storage device connection 62

USB storage device content playback 62

User Cancel (YPAO error message) 43

VERSION (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 107

Version error (error indication) 121

Video (Setup menu) 95

VIDEO AUXjack 8, 9

Video device connection 28

VIDEO jack 22

Video Mode (Option menu) 80

Video Mode (Video, Setup menu) 95

Video Out (input menu) 83

Video pin cable 22

Video Signal (Information menu) 104

Video signal flow 126

Video signal type setting 106

Video/audio input jack combination 29

Virtual CINEMA DSP 48

Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 7

Voltage Selection 35

VOLTAGE SELECTOR 11, 12

Volume Interlock (Input menu) 83

Volume Trim (Option menu) 80

VPS (Virtual Presence Speaker) 7

Wallpaper (Display Set, Setup menu) 101

Wiring (YPAO measurement result) 42

Yamaha Parametric room

Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) 37

YPAO

(Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer

YPAO error message 43

YPAO MICjack 8, 9

YPAO microphone 37

YPAO warning message 44

Zone Rename (Main Zone Set, Setup menu) 99

Zone Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 100

Zone2 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 100

Zone2 speaker connection 73

APPENDIX • Index

En138

OYAMAHA

YAMAHA CORPORATION

List of remote control codes

Liste des codes de commande

Liste der Fernbedienungscodes

Lista liver fjiirrstyrningskoder

Elenco dei codici di telecomando

Lista de codigos de mando a distancia

Anam 0179, 0343

TV Anam National 0052, 0058

Anglo 0323, 0343

A.R. Systems 0320 Anitech 0171, 0320,

Acme 0342 0343

Acura 0323, 0343 Ansonic 0161,0168,

ADC 0337 0341, 0343

Admiral 0054, 0178, 0336, 0337, AOC 0008, 0026,

0339, 0346, 0347 Apex 0039, 0111,

Advent 0158 Arcam 0277, 0282

Adventura 0057 Arcam Delta 0342

Adyson 0277, 0282, 0342 Aristona 0320, 0349,

Agashi 0277, 0282 Arthur Martin 0321

Agazi 0337 ASA 0339, 0347

Aiko 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, Asberg 0171, 0320,

0342, 0343 Astra 0343

Aim 0320 Asuka 0277, 0282,

Aiwa 0078, 0379 0342

Akai 0050, 0055, 0109, 0159, Atlantic 0277, 0320,

0181, 0277, 0282, 0320, 0350

0323, 0340, 0343, 0349, Atori 0323, 0343

0350 Auchan 0321

Akiba 0320, 0340 Audiosonic 0161,0282,

Akura 0320, 0323, 0337, 0340 0342, 0343,

Alaron 0277 AudioTon 0161, 0282,

Alba 0161, 0277, 0320, 0323, Audiovox 0058, 0179,

0340, 0342, 0343, 0344, Ausind 0171

0349, 0351, 0372, 0382 Autovox 0171,0282,

Albatron 0140 0342

Alcyon 0171 Aventura 0051

Alleron 0059 A'a,a 0277, 0282

Allorgan 0282 Axion 0156

Allstar 0320, 0350 Baird 0282

America Action 0179 Bang & Olufsen 0180, 0339

AMOi 0276 Basic Line 0282, 0320,

Amplivision 0161,0282, 0321,0342 0343, 0350

Amstrad 0320, 0323, 0337, 0340, Bastide 0282, 0342

0343 Baur 0320, 0349

Amtron 0058

0323,0337,

0320,0323,

0050,0053

0217

0350

0337,0340,

0342, 0349,

0320,0340,

0349,0350

0342

0194

0337,0339,

0323,0340,

Lijst met afstandsbedieningscodes

Liste over fjernbetjeningskoder

Liste over fjernkontrollkoder

Cn_coK KO_tOB_IHcTaNLIHONNOrO ynpaBneNH_

Bazin 0282 Casio 0367

Beko 0161, 0269, 0294, 0302, Cathay 0320, 0349, 0350

0311, 0320, 0328, 0351 CCE 0183, 0282

Belcor 0008 Celebrity 0055, 0107

Bell & Howell 0019, 0054 Celera 0039

Benq 0097, 0242, 0361 Centurion 0320, 0349, 0350

Beon 0320, 0349, 0350 Century 0339

Best 0161 CGE 0161, 0171

Bestar 0161, 0320, 0350 Changhong 0039

BGH 0400 Chimei 0273

Binatone 0282, 0342 Cimline 0323, 0343

Blue Sky 0320, 0340 Citizen 0007, 0008, 0026, 0050,

Blue Star 0348 0058

Boots 0282, 0342 City 0323, 0343

BPL 0320, 0348 Clarion 0179

BradtUrd 0058, 0179 Clarivox 0349

Brandt 0322, 0345 Clatronic 0161,0171,0282, 0320,

Brillian 0182 0323, 0337, 0340, 0342,

Brinkmann 0320 0343, 0350, 0351

Brionvega 0320, 0339, 0349, 0350 CMS 0277

Britannia 0277, 0282, 0342 CMS Hightec 0282

Brockwood 0008 Coby 0197

Broksonic 0109, 0179 Colortyme 0008, 0026

Bruns 0339 Commercial Solutions

BTC 0340 0021

Bush 0269, 0282, 0283, 0304, Concerto 0008, 0026

0320, 0323, 0328, 0332, Concorde 0323, 0343

0340, 0343, 0344, 0346, Condor 0161,0277, 0320, 0323,

0348, 0349, 0350, 0372, 0342, 0350, 0351

0382, 0463, 0470, 0472 Contec 0179, 0277, 0323, 0342,

by&sign 0093 0343, 0344

Candle 0008, 0026, 0050, 0057 Contec/Cony 0012, 0058

Capsonic 0337 Continental Edison

Carena 0320 0345

Carnivale 0050 Cosmel 0323, 0343

Carrefour 0344 Craig 0058, 0179

Carver 0010 Crosley 0010, 0037, 0171, 0339

Cascade 0320, 0323, 0343

Crown

CS Electronics

CTC Clatronic

CTX

Curtis Mathes

CXC

Cybertron

Cytron

Daewoo

Dainichi

Dansai

Dantax

Dawa

Daytron

De Graaf

Decca

Dell

Denver

Desmet

Diamant

Diamond

DiamondVision

Dimensia

Disney

Dixi

Dream Vision

DTS

Dual

Dual-Tec

Dumont

Durabrand

Dux

Dwin

Dynatron

Dynex

EIZO

Elbe

0058,

0320,

0350,

0277,

0341

0205

0007,

0021,

0178

0058,

0340

0152

0007,

0053,

0277,

0323,

0343,

0277,

0349,

0161,

0320

0007,

0343

0346

0282,

0350

0145,

0358,

0320,

0320

0277

0135,

0049

0219

0282.

03491

0461.

03231

02821

03421

00081

03391

00311

0349

0178

0320,

0228,

0509

0161,

0161, 0171,0179,

0323,0343,0349,

0351

0340,0342

0008,0010,0019,

0026,0049,0050,

0179

0008,0026,0037,

0167,0266,0275,

0282,0315,0320,

0331,0335,0342,

0350,0381,0465

0340

0282,0320,0337,

0350

0349

0008,0026,0323,

0320,0342,0349,

0245

0362

0349,0350

0143

0320.0323,0343,

0350

0498

0343

0320,0342

0343

0030,0062,0282,

0341,0342

0051,0179, 0215

0349,0350

0231

0168,0282,0320

Elcit

Electa

ELECTRO TECH

Electroband

Electrograph

Electrohome

Element

Elin

Elite

Elman

Elta

Emerson

Emprex

Envision

Epson

Erres

ESA

ESC

Etron

Eurofeel

Euro-Feel

Euroline

gurolnan

guroulann

Europhon

Expert

Exquisit

Fenner

Ferguson

Fidelity

Filsai

Finlandia

Finlux

FIRST LINE

Firstline

Fisher

Flint

Formenti

F0rmenti/Phoenix

Fortress

Fraba

Friac

0339

0348

0343

0055,

0176

0008,

0230

0277,

0349,

0320,

0341

0277,

0000,

0013,

0037,

0161,

0154

0008,

0155,

0320,

0051

0282

0343

0282

0337

0349

0161,

0320,

0277,

0342,

0321

0320

0323,

0322,

0277,

0282

0346

0171,

0341,

0342,

0277,

0019,

0342,

0320,

0171,

0342,

0277

0336,

0161,

0161

0107

0026,0052,0055

0320, 0323, 0342,

0350

0340, 0350

0323, 0343

0007,0008,0012,

0019,0026,0031,

0051,0058,0059,

0179,0320,0339

0026, 0050

0206, 0359

0349, 0350

0277,0282

0337,0342,0350

0282,0320,0341,

0350

0343

0345, 0349

0320, 0342, 0346

0282,0320,0339,

0342,0349,0350

0343,0350

0282, 0320, 0323

0161, 0282, 0339,

0344, 0351

0350

0277,0336,0339,

0349

0339

0320

Frontech

Fujitsu

Fujitsu General

Fujitsu Siemens

Funai

Futuretech

Galaxi

Galaxis

Gateway

GBC

Geant Casino

GEC

Geloso

General Technic

Genexxa

GFM

Giant

Gibralter

GoldHand

Goktline

GoldStar

Goodmans

Gorenje

GPM

GPX

Gradiente

Graetz

Granada

Grandin

Gronic

Grundig

0282,

0346,

0059,

0282

0504,

0511

0051,

0113,

0179,

0058,

0320,

0161,

0176,

0323,

0008,

0027,

0052,

0321

0282,

0349,

0323,

0320,

0128,

0282

0008,

0277

0320

0007,

0031,

0277,

0342,

0350

0246,

0323,

0349,

0477

0161,

0340

0129

0240

0347

0171,

0342,

0350

0340,

0282

0160,

0320

0323,0337,0343,

0347

0069, 0074, 0075,

0505,0507,0510,

0058,0059,0112,

0115,0118,0119,

0337,0488,0489

0179

0351

0320

0177, 0241

0343, 0344

0021,0023,0026,

0031,0034,0049,

0056,0209

0320,0342,0347,

0350

0343,0346

0343

0340,0347,0350

0227

0030,0050,0062

0008,0012,0026,

0050,0053,0161,

0282,0320,0323,

0343,0346,0349,

0272,0282,0320,

0337,0343,0344,

0350,0462,0473,

0351

0282,0320,0321,

0344,0346,0349,

0343,0348,0349

0161,0171,0310,

Grunpy

Haier

Halifax

Hallmark

Hampton

Hanseatic

Hantarex

Hantor

Harman/Kardon

Harvard

Harwood

Havermy

HCM

Hema

Hewlett Packard

Higashi

HiLine

Hinari

Hisawa

Hisense

Hitachi

Hornyphon

Hoshai

Huanyu

Hygashi

Hyper

Hypson

Hyundai

Iberia

ICE

ICeS

Ilo

IMA

hnperial

0058, 0059,

0157, 0233

0277,0282,

0008,0026,

0277,0282,

0161,0168,

0323, 0342,

0349, 0350

0320,0323,

0320

0010

0058,0179

0320, 0323

0178

0282, 0320,

0342,0343,

0282,0323

0192

0277

0320

0320,0323,

0344,0349,

0321,0340,

0247

0008,0012,

0084, 0092,

0172, 0173,

0271,0282,

0338, 0342,

0347, 0365,

0456, 0467,

0487

0320,0350

0340

0277,0342

0277,0282,

0343

0282, 0320,

0342,0348,

0141

0320

0277,0282,

0337, 0340,

0350

0277

0148, 0153

0058

0161,0171,

0350, 0351

0179

0337,0342

0031

0342

0282, 0320,

0343, 0344,

0343

0323, 0337,

0348

0340, 0343,

0350

0348

0026,0066,

0093, 0120,

0255, 0270,

0320, 0335,

0344, 0346,

0382, 0448,

0482, 0484,

0342

0323, 0342,

0321, 0337,

0349,0350

0320, 0323,

0342, 0343,

0320,0347,

Indiana

Infinity

lnFocus

lngelen

lngersol

Initial

lnnoHit

Innovation

Insignia

lnteq

Interactive

lnterbuy

lnterfunk

International

lntervision

lrradio

lsukai

ITC

ITS

ITT

ITV

Janeil

JBL

JCPenney

JCB

Jensen

JVC

Kaisui

Kamosonic

Kamp

Kapsch

Karcher

Kawasho

KEC

Kendo

Kenwood

KIC

0320,

0010

0250,

0508

0347

0323,

0153

0171,

0340,

0350

0337,

0131,

0030

0161

0323,

0161,

0349,

0277

0161,

0341,

0171,

0343,

0320,

0282,

0277,

0350

0343,

0320,

0057

0010

0007,

0049,

0055,

0008,

0012,

0064,

0174,

0350,

0277,

0340,

0342

0277,

0347

0161,

0349

0008,

0179

0161,

0008,

0282

0349,0350

0327,0363,0479,

0343

0282,0320,0323,

0342,0343,0349,

0343

0228,0236,0238

0343

0320,0339,0347,

0350

0282,0320,0337,

0342

0320,0323,0340,

0349,0350

0340

0342

0320,0340,0348,

0347

0343,0349

0008,0026,0027,

0053,0056

0107

0026

0014,0015,0056,

0065,0067,0169,

0297,0314,0344,

0375

0282,0320,0323,

0342,0343,0348

0342

0320,0342,0343,

0026,0055,0277

0320,0341,0346

0026,0050

Kingsley

KLH

Kl0ssN0vabeam

Kneissel

Kolster

Konka

Korpel

Korting

Kosnlos

Koyoda

KTV

Kyoto

Lasat

Lenco

Lenoir

Leyco

LG/GoldStar

Liesenk

Liesenkotter

Life

Lifetec

Lloyds

Loewe

LoeweOpta

Logik

Luma

Lumatron

LuxMay

Luxnlan

Luxor

LXI

MElectronic

MAG

Magnadyne

Magnal_n

0277,

0039

0057,

0161,

0320,

0340

0320,

0161,

0320

0343

0007,

0183,

0277,

0161

0323,

0320,

0031,

0117,

0175,

0282,

0320,

0343,

0366,

0471,

0164

0349

0320

0337,

0320,

0323

0161,

0330,

0339,

0054

0320,

0282,

0350

0008,

0282,

0010,

0027,

0342,

0349,

0096

0339,

0171,

0342

0058

0168,

0350

0349,

0339

0050,

0282,

0282

0343

0342,

0337,

0053,

0140,

0195,

0300,

0323,

0346,

0368,

0478

0343

0323,

0168,

0352

0349,

0323,

0320,

0026

0342,

0019,

0031,

0343,

0350

0341,

0277,

0320

0350

0058,0179,

0342

0343

0349,0350

0066,0116,

0161,0164,

0269,0277,

0309,0317,

0328,0342,

0349,0350,

0377,0466,

0337,0343

0265,0320,

0350

0346,0349

0346,0349,

0346

0021,0026,

0049,0111

0345,0347,

0349

0341,0342

Magnavox0008,0009,

0026,0032,

0050,0128,

0224,0226,

Magnum 0337,0343

M_estic 0054

Mandor 0337

Manesth 0282,0320,

0349,0350

Marantz 0008,0010,

0204,0320,

Marelli 0339

Mark 0277,0282,

0349,0350

Masuda 0282

Matsui 0282,0320,

0343,0344,

0350,0455

Matsushita0017

Maxent 0147,0176

Mediator 0320,0349,

Medion 0320,0337,

Megapower0140

Megatron0026,0031

MElectronic0277,0282,

Melvox 0321

Memorex 0019,0026,

0054,0137,

0343

Memphis 0323,0343

Mercury 0320,0323

Metz 0339

MGA 0008,0026,

0053

Micromaxx0337,0343

Microstar 0337,0343

Midland 0007,0021,

0030,0056,

Minerva 0171

Minoka 0320,0350

Mintek 0153

Mitsubishi0008,0026,

0066,0084,

0150,0178,

0339,0344,

Mivar 0161,0168,

0282,0342

Monivision0140

MontgomeryWard

0054

0010,0013,

0033,0048,

0211,0212,

0239

0337,0342,

0026,0050,

0349,0350

0320,0323,

0323,0342,

0346,0349,

0350

0343

0320,0323

0031,0053,

0215,0323,

0031,0050,

0023,0027,

0062

0031,0053,

0093,0098,

0289,0320,

0350,0376

0171,0277,

Motion

Motorola

MTC

MultiSystem

Multitech

Murphy

NAD

Naonis

NEC

Neckermann

NEI

Net-TV

Neufunk

NewTech

NewWorld

NewTech

Nicamagic

Nikkai

Nikko

Nobliko

Nokia

Norcent

Nordic

Nordmende

Nordvision

Novatronic

Oceanic

Okano

Olevia

ONCEAS

Onwa

Opera

Oppo

Optimus

Optoma

Optonica

Orbit

0171

0052,0178

0008,0026,0050,0053,

0161,0277

0349

0058,0161,0179,0183,

0277,0282,0320,0323,

0341,0342,0343,0344,

0346,0349

0277,0342

0026,0031,0111

0346

0008,0026,0050,0052,

0053,0072,0103,0282,

0344

0161,0282,0320,0339,

0342,0346,0349,0350,

0351

0320,0349,0350

0176

0320,0323

0343,0350

0340

0282,0320,0323

0277,0342

0277,0282,0320,0323,

0337,0340,0342,0349,

0350

0026,0031,0050

0171,0277,0341,0342

0347

0201

0282

0339,0345,0347,0350

0349

0320

0321,0347

0161,0320,0351

0102,0199,0200,0207,

0222

0342

0058,0179

0320

0130

0017,0019

0144

0178

0320,0350

Orion

Orline

Osaki

Oso

OttoVersand

Pael

Palladium

Palsonic

Panama

Panasonic

Panavision

Pathe Cinema

Pausa

Penney

Perdio

Perfekt

Philco

Philharmonic

Philips

Philips Magnav0x

Phoenix

0043,

0323,

0350

0320

0282,

0342

0340

0282,

0344,

0277,

0161,

0351

0282

0277.

03371

00161

00231

0084.

01931

02921

03561

0320

0161,

0342

0323,

0021,

0111

0277,

0320

0008,

0026,

0161,

0282,

0008,

0012,

0052,

0186,

0224,

0257,

0267,

0296,

0305,

0324,

0349,

0360,

0459,

0011,

0161,

0349,

0146,0283,0320,

0328,0343,0349,

0320,0337,0340,

0320,0336,0342,

0348,0349,0350

0342

0282,0320,0342,

0282.0320.0323,

034210343

001710020,0022,

003510052,0056,

008510133,0163,

028410286,0290,

032010325,0347,

048310485,0490

0168,0277,0321,

0343

0023,0031,0050,

0320

0009,0010,0012,

0050,0052,0053,

0171, 0320,0339

0342

0009.0010,0011,

0032.0048,0049,

0122.0128,0134,

0187.0213,0221,

0226.0239,0256,

0259.0261,0263,

0280.0281,0287,

0299.0301,0303,

0313.0319,0320,

0333.0339,0342,

0350.0353,0357,

0380.0383,0452,

0460

0032, 0033

0277,0320,0339,

0350

Phonola 0277, 0320,

0350

Pilot 0007, 0008,

Pioneer 0008, 0026,

0161, 0320,

0349, 0350,

Plantron 0320, 0323,

Playsonic 0282

Polaroid 0039, 0142,

Poppy 0323, 0343

Porthmd 0007, 0008,

Prand0ni-Prince 0171, 0346

Precision 0282, 0342

Prima 0157, 0243,

0347

Princeton 0140

Prism 0023, 0056

Profex 0323, 0343

Profl-Tronic 0320, 0350

Proline 0320, 0350

Proscan 0021, 0027,

Prosonic 0161, 0277,

0342, 0349

Protech 0282, 0337,

0343, 0349,

Proton 0008, 0012,

Protron 0196

PROVIEW 0096, 0246

Provision 0320, 0349

Pulsar 0008, 0030,

Pye 0256, 0320,

0378

Pymi 0323, 0343

Quandra Vision 0321

Quasar 0017, 0023,

Quelle 0282, 0320,

0349, 0350

Questa 0344

Radialva 0320

RadioShack 0019, 0021,

0179, 0320

RadioShack/Realistic

0007, 0008,

0049, 0058

Radiola 0282, 0320,

Radiomarelli 0320, 0339

Radiotone 0161, 0320,

Rank 0344

0339, 0349,

0050

0094,0095,

0345,0347,

0458,0480

0337, 0350

0202, 0234

0026, 0053

0323,0343,

0049

0282,0320,

0341,0342,

0350

0026,0031

0062

0349,0350,

0052,0056

0337,0342,

0031,0050,

0012,0026,

0349,0350

0323, 0350

RCA

Realistic

Recor

Redstar

Reflex

Revox

Rex

RFT

Rhapsody

R-Line

Roadstar

Robotron

Rowa

Royal Lux

RTF

Runco

Saba

Saisho

Salora

Sambers

Sampo

Samsung

Sandra

Sansui

Sanyo

SBR

Sceptre

Schaub Lorenz

0008,

0026,

0052,

0225

0019,

0320

0161,

0337,

0161,

0277

0320,

0323,

0339

0277,

0494

0161

0339

0030,

0298,

0347

0282,

0343

0346,

0171,

0007,

0176,

0004,

0008,

0036,

0077,

0125,

0161,

0191,

0282,

0337,

0350,

0468

0277,

0043,

0400

0008,

0071,

0223,

0288,

0344,

0320,

0235,

0347

0021,0024,0025,

0027,0042,0049,

0053,0063,0136,

0031,0050,0179

0320,0349,0350

0346,0347

0168,0339

0349,0350

0337,0340,0343

0282,0400,0403,

0050,0062

0322,0339,0345,

0323,0337,0342,

0347

0341

0008,0026,0050,

0400

0005.0006,0007,

0012 0026,0031,

0050 0053,0076,

0079.0114,0124,

0126.0127,0139,

0183.0185,0190,

0258 0264,0277,

0320.0323,0334,

0342 0343,0349,

0351 0373,0453,

0282,0342

0109,0320,0350,

0019,0068,0070,

0099,0161,0168,

0237,0277,0282,

0295,0323,0342,

0369,0469

0349

0244

Schneider

Scotch

Scott

Sears

SEG

SEI

SEI-Sinudyne

Seleco

Sencora

Sentra

Serino

Sharp

Sheng Chia

Shogun

Siarem

Sierra

Siesta

Signature

Silva

Silver

Singer

Sinudyne

Skantic

Skyworth

Solavox

Sonitron

Sonoko

Sonolor

Sontec

0282,0316,0318,0320,

0333, 0340, 0342, 0349,

0350, 0382

0026,0031

0008, 0012, 0026, 0031,

0058,0059,0149,0179

0008, 0010, 0019, 0021,

0026,0027,0031,0049,

0051,0059,0111

0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,

0337, 0341, 0342, 0344,

0349, 0382

0320

0339, 0341,0347

0344, 0346, 0347

0323, 0343

0323

0277

0000, 0001, 0002, 0003,

0007, 0008, 0012, 0026,

0060, 0088, 0089, 0091,

0138, 0165, 0170, 0178,

0198, 0229, 0262, 0278,

0279, 0291, 0308, 0312,

0336, 0344, 0354, 0370,

0449, 0450, 0451, 0464,

0474,0476,0481

0178

0008

0320, 0339, 0341

0320, 0350

0161

0054

0277

0344

0321, 0339, 0341

0320,0339,0341,0349

0347

0402,0492,0493,0495

0347

0161, 0282

0282, 0320,0323,0337,

0342,0343,0349,0350

0321, 0347

0161,0320,0349,0350

Sony

Sound&Vision

Soundesign

Sonndwave

Squareview

SSS

Standard

St:trlite

Stenway

Stern

Strato

Stylandia

Sunkai

Sunstar

Sunwood

Superla

Superscan

SuperTech

Supra

Supre-Macy

Supreme

S 1.1s 1.1in 1.1

Sutron

SVA

Sydney

Sylvania

Symphonic

Syntax

Syntax-Brillian

Sysline

Sytong

Tandy

Tashiko

Tatung

TCM

0038,

0055,

0107,

0220,

0252,

0344,

0475,

0340,

0008,

0059,

0320,

0051

0008,

0282,

0342,

0058,

0349

0348

0346,

0320,

0282

0343

0320,

0277,

0013,

0277,

0323,

0057

0055,

0340

0323,

0151

0277,

0008,

0013,

0051,

0179,

0199

0349

0277

0178,

0342,

0277,

0346

0052,

0342,

0337,

0044,0045,0047,

0090,0104,0105,

0110,0123,0184,

0248,0249,0251,

0254,0326,0343,

0371,0374,0457,

0486

0341

0026,0031,0058,

0179

0349,0350

0058,0179

0320,0323,0340,

0343,0350

0179,0320,0323,

0347

0323

0323,0343,0350

0282,0342

0178

0320,0323

0343

0107

0343

0282,0342

0009,0010,0011,

0026,0048,0050,

0128,0227,0253

0058,0062,0128,

0215

0282,0336,0340,

0347

0282,0342,0344,

0177,0282,0320,

0349,0350

0343

TCL

Teac

Tec

Technics

TechniSat

Techwood

TEDELEX

Teknika

Teleavia

Telecor

Telefunken

Telegazi

Telemeister

Telesonic

Telestar

Teletech

Teleton

Televideon

Televiso

Tensai

Tesmet

Tevion

Texet

Thomson

Thorn

TMK

TNCi

Tokai

Tokyo

Tomashi

Toshiba

Totevision

Towada

Trakton

Trans Continens

Transtec

Trident

0400,

0494

0282,

0017,

0274,

0008,

0282

0007,

0026,

0059,

0345

0282,

0320,

0320

0320,

0282,

0277

0321

0282,

0343,

0350

0337,

0277,

0162,

0320,

0350

0320,

0008,

0030

0282,

0277,

0348

0018,

0046,

0108,

0132,

0214,

0282,

0306,

0355,

0007

0282,

0282

0282,

0277

0282

0401,

0320,

0323,

0023,

0496,

0023,

0008,

0053,

0179

0320

0322,

0323,

0342

0320,

0350

0343

0282,

0188,

0322,

0349

0026,

0320,

0342

0019,

0073,

0109,

0166,

0217,

0283,

0307,

0454,

0347

0320

0403,0406,

0400

0342,0343

0056

0497, 0499

0026, 0056

0010,0012,

0054,0058,

0345, 0350

0343, 0349

0323,0340,

0323,0342

0189,0285,

0342,0345,

0031

0350

0040,0041,

0100,0103,

0111,0121,

0208,0210,

0260,0268,

0293,0304,

0329,0344,

0491

Triumph 0320 Yamaha 0008, 0026, 0050, 0053,

Uher 0161, 0171,0320, 0347, 0080, 0081, 0082, 0083,

0350 0086, 0087

Ultravox 0277, 0320, 0339, 0341, Yamishi 0282, 0320

0342 Yokan 0320

Unic Line 0320 Yoko 0161,0277, 0282, 0320,

United 0349 0323, 0337, 0340, 0342,

Universum 0161, 0171,0282, 0320, 0343, 0349, 0350

0337, 0349, 0350, 0351 Yorx 0340

Univox 0320 Zanussi 0282, 0346

Vector Research 0050 Zenith 0008, 0028, 0029, 0030,

Vestel 0282, 0320, 0346, 0347, 0031,0054, 0061,0062

0349, 0350, 0351

Vexa 0320, 0323, 0343, 0349

Victor 0015, 0344, 0350 VCR

VIDEOLOGIC 0277

Videologique 0277, 0282, 0340, 0342 ABS 1016

VideoSystem 0320, 0350 Adventura 1069

Videotechnic 0277, 0282 Adyson 1008

Vidikron 0010 Aiwa 1024, 1026, 1027, 1069

Vidtech 0008, 0026, 0031, 0053 Akai 1021, 1027

Viewsonic 0176, 0203, 0232, 0364 Akiba 1008, 1029

Viking 0057 Akura 1008, 1027, 1029

Viore 0148 Alba 1008, 1009, 1024, 1025,

Visiola 0277, 0342 1029, 1030

Vision 0282, 0320, 0350 Alienware 1016

Vizio 0008, 0177, 0218, 0242, Ambassador 1030

0500, 0501,0502, 0503, American High 1068

0506 Amstrad 1008, 1009, 1026

Vortec 0320, 0349, 0350 Anitech 1008, 1029

Voxson 0171, 0320, 0339, 0346, Apex 1088

0347, 0350 ASA 1028, 1031

W:tltham 0282, 0320, 0342 Asha 1070

Wards 0008, 0009, 0010, 0026, Asuka 1008, 1026, 1028, 1029,

0031, 0048, 0049, 0050, 1031

0053, 0054, 0059 Audio Dynamics 1064

Watson 0320, 0349, 0350 Audiosonic 1009

Watt Radio 0277, 0341,0342 Audiovox 1071

Waycon 0111 Baird 1009, 1025, 1026, 1027

Wega 0320, 0339, 0344 Bang & Ohffsen 1017

Wegavox 0323 Basic Line 1008, 1009, 1024, 1025,

Weltblick 0282, 0320, 0349, 0350 1029, 1030

Westinghouse 0107, 0216, 0220 Baur 1028

White Westinghouse Beaumark 1070

0037, 0090, 0277, 0320, Bell & Howell 1065

0341, 0342, 0349 Bestar 1009, 1025, 1030

Wincom 0101, 0106 Black Panther Line

Xrypton 0320 1009, 1025

Blaupunkt 1028

Bondstec 1008, 1030

Broksonic

Bush

Calix

Candle

Canon

Cathay

Catron

CGE

Cimline

CineVision

Citizen

Clatronic

Colortyme

Condor

Craig

Crown

CurtisMathes

Cybernex

CyberPower

Daewoo

Dansai

Dantax

Daytron

DBX

DeGraaf

Decca

Dell

Denko

DiamondVision

DigiFusion

DIRECTV

DishNetwork

Dishpro

Dual

Dumont

Durabrand

Dynatech

Echostar

Elbe

Elcatech

Electrohome

Electrophonic

Elsay

Elta

1100

1008,

1029,

1217

1071

1070,

1068

1009

1030

1026,

1008,

1104

1070,

1008,

1064

1009,

1070,

1008,

1030

1064,

1070

1016

1009,

1069,

1008,

1024

1009,

1064

1028

1026,

1016

1008

1096

1014

1019,

1113,

1018

1009,

1026,

1114

1069

1018

1009

1008

1071

1008

1008,

1009,1024,1025,

1049,1051,1063,

1071

1027

1024,1029

1071

1030

1025,1030

1071

1009,1025,1029,

1068,1070

1025,1030,1038,

1223

1009,1029

1025

1027,1028

1105,1110,1111,

1116,1122

1027,1028

1028

1009,1029

Emerson

ESC

Etzuko

Expressvu

Ferguson

Fidelity

Finlandia

Finlux

Firstline

Fisher

Flint

F0rmenti/Phoenix

Frontech

Fuji

Fujitsu

Funai

Galaxy

Garrard

Gateway

GBC

GEC

Geloso

General

GeneralTechnic

GOI

GoldHand

Goldstar

Goodmans

Gradiente

Graetz

Granada

Grandin

Grundig

Hanseatic

HarleyDavidson

Harman/Kardon

Harwood

HCM

Headquarter

HewlettPackard

Hinari

Hisawa

Hitachi

HNS

1008,

1071

1009,

1008,

1018

1027

1008,

1028

1026,

1008,

1065

1024

1028

1030

1068

1026

1026,

1026

1069

1016

1029,

1068,

1028

1029

1030

1024

1018

1008,

1026,

1008,

1029,

1069

1027

1028

1008,

1029,

1028,

1009,

1069

1064

1008

1008,

1065

1016

1008,

1024

1011,

1046,

1110

1020,1068,1069,

1025

1029

1026

1027,1028

1024,1029,1031

1069

1030

1070

1029

1031,1064,1071

1009,1025,1026,

1030,1031

1009,1025,1026,

1030,1031

1029

1028,1031

1029

1009,1024,1029

1026,1027,1028,

1062

HowardComputers

1016

HP 1016

HTS 1018

Hughes 1111,1113,1122

HughesNetworkSystems

1110,1116

Humax 1012,1110,1113

Hush 1016

Hypson 1008,1009,1024,1029

iBUYPOWER1016

lmpego 1030

Imperial 1026

lnnoHit 1008,1009,1025,1028,

1029,1030

Innovation1024

InstantReplay1068

lnterbuy 1008,1031

lnterfimk 1028

lntervision1009,1026

lrradio 1008,1029,1031

ITT 1027

ITV 1009,1025,1031

JCPenney 1064,1065,1068,1070,

1071

JCL 1068

JVC 1007,1018,1027,1039,

1064,1065,1066,1067,

1078,1089,1092,1093,

1094,1095,1113,1208,

1209,1212,1213,1215,

1218

Kaisui 1008,1029

Karcher 1028

Kendo 1008,1024,1025,1030

Kenwood 1027,1064,1065

Kodak 1068,1071

Korpel 1008,1029

Kyoto 1008

Lenco 1025

Leyco 1008,1029

LG 1010,1026,1031,1047,

1054,1056,1071,1103,

1221

Li_tec 1024

Linksys 1016

Lloyd's 1069

LoeweOpta 1028,1031

Logik 1008,1029

Lumatron 1009,1025

Luxor

LXI

MElectronic

Magnavox

Magnin

Manesth

Marantz

Mark

Marta

Matsui

Matsushita

MediaCenterPC

Mediator

Medion

MEI

Memorex

Memphis

MGNTechnology

Micromaxx

Microsoft

Microstar

Migros

Mind

Mitsubishi

Motorola

MTC

Multitech

Murphy

NEC

Neckermann

NEI

Nesco

Nikkai

Nikko

NiveusMedia

Noblex

Nokia

Nordmende

Northgate

Oceanic

Okano

Olympus

Optimus

Orion

Orson

Osaki

1008

1071

1026

1020,1068,1114,1126

1071

1008,1029

1028,1064,1065,1068

1009

1071

1024,1031

1068

1016

1028

1024

1068

1023,1026,1031,1065,

1068,1069,1070,1071,

1098,1114

1008,1029

1070

1024

1016

1024

1026

1016

1026,1028,1079

1068

1070

1008,1026,1028,1029,

1030,1069,1070

1026

1027,1064,1065

1027,1028

1028

1008,1029

1008,1009,1030

1071

1016

1070

1009,1027

1027

1016

1026,1027

1008,1009,1024

1068

1071

1023,1024,1051,1115,

1217

1026

1008,1026,1029,1031

OttoVersand1028

Palladium1008,1027,1029,1031

Panasonic1000,1022,1044,1055,

1068,1072,1085,1090,

1091,1120,1121,1214

PatheMarconi1027

Perdio 1026

Philco 1008,1068

Philips 1006,1013,1028,1035,

1040,1045,1046,1050,

1058,1059,1061,1068,

1076,1101,1110,1113,

1116,1117,1122,1126,

1210,1211

PhilipsMagnav0x1076

Phonola 1028

Pilot 1071

Pioneer 1028,1036

Polaroid 1088,1099

Portland 1009,1025,1030

Prinz 1026

Profex 1029

Proline 1026

Proscan 1019

Prosonic 1009,1024

Pulsar 1114

Pye 1028,1102

Quarter 1065

Quartz 1065

Quasar 1068

Quelle 1026,1028

Radialva 1008

RadioShack1071

RadioShack/Realistic

1065,1068,1069,1070,

1071

Radiola 1028

Radix 1071

Randex 1071

RCA 1019,1068,1070,1075,

1110,1113,1122,1125

Realistic 1065,1068,1069,1070,

1071

ReplayTV1022,1123

Rex 1027

RFF 1008,1028,1030

Ricavision1016

Roadstar 1008,1009,1025,1029,

1031

Royal 1008

Runco

Saba

Saisho

Samsung

Samurai

Sanky

Sansui

Sanyo

Saville

SBR

SchanbLorenz

Schneider

Sears

SEG

SEI-Sinudyne

Seleco

Sentra

Sentron

Sharp

Shintom

Shivaki

Shogun

Siemens

Silva

Silver

Singer

Sinudyne

Solavox

SonicBlue

Sonneclair

Sonoko

Sontec

Sony

Stack

Stack9

Standard

Stern

STS

Sunkai

Sunstar

Suntronic

1114

1027

1024,

1002,

1057,

1110,

1220,

1008,

1114

1023,

1032,

1009

1028

1026,

1008,

1026,

1031

1065,

1008,

1028

1027

1008,

1003,

1127,

1008,

1031

1070

1031

1009

1068

1028

1030

1022,

1008

1009,

1031

1001,

1073,

1082,

1216

1016

1009,

1009

1068

1024

1026

1029

1034,1041,1043,

1060,1070,1084,

1116,1122,1124,

1222

1030

1027,1106,1115

1065,1070

1027

1009,1024,1025,

1028,1029,1030,

1068,1071

1009,1029

1030

1029

1033,1077,1107,

1219

1029

1123

1025

1016,1048,1053,

1074,1080,1081,

1083,1108,1118,

1025

Sunwood

Superscan

Sylvania

Symphonic

Systemax

TagarSystems

Taisho

Tandberg

Tandy

Tashiko

Tatung

TCM

Teac

Tec

Technics

Teknika

Teleavia

Telefunken

Teletech

Tenosal

Tensai

Tevion

Thomson

Thorn

Tivo

TMK

Tokai

Tonsai

Toshiba

Totevision

Touch

Towada

Towika

TVA

Uher

UltimateTV

Ultravox

Unitech

UnitedQuickStar

Universnm

VectorResearch

VideoConcepts

Videon

Videosonic

Viewsonic

1008,

1020

1020,

1126

1008,

1016

1024

1009

1065

1026,

1015,

1009,

1008,

1068

1068,

1027

1008,

1024

1005,

1027

1108,

1117,

1070

1008,

1029

1004,

1037,

1087,

1194

1070,

1016

1008,

1030

1031

1019

1009

1070

1009,

1026,

1064

1024

1070

1016

1029

1068,1069,1102,

1069,1126

1071

1027,1028

1024,1042

1069

1009,1030

1069,1071

1009

1029

1026,1029,1031

1027

1110,1111,1113,

1118,1119,1122

1029,1031

1016,1027,1028,

1049,1052,1086,

1097,1109,1112,

1071

1029

1025

1028,1031

Voodoo

Wards

Weltblick

XR-1000

Yamaha

Yamishi

Yokan

Yoko

Zenith

ZTGroup

1016

1068,1069,1070,1071

1031

1068,1069

1064,1065

1008,1029

1008,1029,1030,1031

1114

1016

DVD

4Kus

Accurian

Advent

AEG

Airis

Aiwa

Akai

Akura

Alba

Alco

Alize

Allegro

Amitech

2051

2142

2155,2251

2362

2364

2322

2145,2177,2179,2248

2356

2064,2165,2186,2337,

2346

2149

2361

2133

2362

AmphionMediaWorks

2195

AMW

Apex

Apple

Arrgo

Asono

Aspire

Astar

ATACOM

Audiovox

Avious

A'a,a

Axion

Bang & Ohffsen

Baze

BBK

Bellagio

Best Buy

Blaupunkt

Blue Parade

2195,2363

2030,2124,2125,2126,

2127,2130,2131

2241

2138

2364

2152,2222

2240

2364

2061,2149

2367

2363

2249

2128

2367

2364

2363

2359

2131

2157

Boghe 2382 DUNE 2509

Brainwave 2362 Durabrand 2136

Brandt 2148, 2188 DVX 2355

Broksonic 2145, 2146 Easy Home 2359

Bush 2064, 2110, 2170, 2268, Eclipse 2354

2290, 2346, 2358, 2367, E-Dem 2364

2383 Electrohome 2362

California Audio Labs Elin 2362

2151 Elta 2341,

Cambridge Audio 2354 Emerson 2129,

CAT 2352, 2353 Enterprise 2129

CAVS 2192 Enzer 2380

Centrum 2353 Epson 2247

CGV 2354, 2362 ESA 2137

Changhong 2140 Finlux 2354,

Cinetec 2363 Fintec 2377

CineVision 2133, 2237 Fisher 2134

Clatronic 2358, 2367 Funai 2137

Coby 2031, 2046, 2360 Gateway 2051

Conia 2383 GE 2029,

Continental Edison Gericom 2351

2363 GFM 2226

Crown 2362 Giec 2382

C-Tech 2355 Global Solutions 2355

Curtis Mathes 2139 Global Sphere 2355

CVG 2377 Go Video 2133,

CyberHome 2022, 2098, 2138, 2187, Goodmans 2165,

2336 2371,

Cytron 2244 GPX 2227

Daenyx 2363 Gradiente 2151

Daewoo 2001, 2133, 2276, 2298, Graetz 2380

2330, 2362, 2363, 2377 Greenhill 2131

Daewoo International Grundig 2349

2363 Grunkel 2362,

Dalton 2357 GVG 2377

Dansai 2362, 2381 H&B 2358

Daytek 2184, 2195, 2363 Hher 2364

Dayton 2363 Haaz 2354,

DEC 2358 Haier 2254

Decca 2362 Harman/Kardon 2047,

Denon 2059, 2151, 2193, 2332 HiMAX 2359

Denver 2356, 2358, 2360, 2370 Hitachi 2062,

Denzel 2380 2316,

Desay 2205 Hiteker 2130

Diamond 2354, 2355 Home Tech Industries

DiamondVision 2225, 2232 2364

Disney 2010, 2028 Hyundai 2366

DK Digital 2339 Ilo 2245

Dmtech 2176 Initial 2131,

Dual 2380 Innovation 2182

2361,2362

2137,2150

2362,2367

2131,2156

2213

2280,2291,2358,

2376,2382

2366

2355

2135

2090,2115,2274,

2359,2380

2245

Insignia

lntegra

lrradio

iSymphony

JBL

JVC

Jwin

Kansai

Kawasaki

Kennex

Kenwood

KeyPlug

Kiiro

Kingavon

Kiss

KLH

Koda

Koss

KXD

Landel

Lasonic

Lawson

Lecson

Lenco

Lenoxx

Life

Lifetec

Limit

Liquid Video

Liteou

Loewe

LogicLab

Magnavox

Magnex

Majestic

Marantz

Marquant

Matsui

Mclntosh

2002,

2157

2053

2246

2135

2020,

2100,

2106,

2260,

2324,

2464,

2471

2198

2360

2149

2362

2041,

2362

2358

2380

2131,

2358

2013,

2359

2143

2132

2355

2381

2358,

2136,

2002,

2129,

2223,

2335,

2182

2355

2158

2043,

2320

2355

2025,

2159,

2367

2360

2328

2362

2148,

2199

2137,2253

2096,2097,2099,

2101,2102,2103,

2107,2160,2257,

2262,2263,2321,

2326,2327,2343,

2465,2468,2469,

2151,2348

2149

2148,2158

2362,2367

2153

2033,2038,2057,

2133,2189,2191,

2238,2270,2288,

2373,2375

2051,2142

2050,2137,2150,

2224,2230,2358

2378

Mecotek

Medion

Melnorex

MiCO

Micromaxx

Microsoft

Microstar

Minoka

Minowa

Mintek

Mitsubishi

Mizuda

Monyka

Mustek

Mx Onda

Mystral

Naiko

Nesa

Neutunk

Nevir

Next Base

Nexxtech

NU-TEC

Onkyo

Oopla

Oppo

Optim

Optimus

Orava

Orbit

Orion

Oritron

P&B

Pacific

Panasonic

Parasound

peeKTON

2362

2182

2028,2145,2234

2354,2382

2182

2156

2182

2362

2367

2131,2245

2003

2358,2359

2380

2186

2354

2366

2362

2131

2380

2362

2143

2243

2383

2159,2368

2051

2196,2255

2381

2180

2358

2363

2073,2110

2148,2158

2358

2355

2011,2024,2034,2042,

2058,2062,2066,2067,

2093,2116,2117,2118,

2119,2120,2121,2122,

2123,2151,2159,2164,

2166,2167,2172,2173,

2175,2209,2214,2275,

2277,2278,2281,2282,

2283,2301,2374,2470

2197

2364

Philips

Phonotrend

Pioneer

Pointer

Polaroid

Portland

Powerpoint

Prima

Proceed

Proscan

Prosonic

Protron

Provision

Pye

Qwestar

Raite

RCA

RedStar

Regent

Reoc

Rimax

Rio

Roadstar

Ronin

Rotel

Rowa

Rownsonic

Saba

Sabaki

Saivod

Sampo

2008, 2012, 2025,2044,

2050 2051, 2053,2060,

2072 2108, 2111,2147,

2159, 2163, 2169,2174,

2181, 2185, 2230,2261,

2266 2267, 2286,2287,

2289, 2295, 2300,2302,

2317, 2328, 2338,2342,

2350 2467

2367

2016 2017, 2018,2019,

2035, 2092, 2094,2095,

2109,2157,2180,2190,

2212 2269, 2272,2299,

2304 2305, 2306,2307,

2308, 2309, 2310,2311,

2344 2345, 2347,2379

2362

2125, 2215, 2235

2362

2363

2252

2130

2156

2360, 2377

2202

2358

2144

2148

2380

2021, 2029, 2104,2105,

2131, 2149, 2156,2157,

2229

2356,2360,2362

2153

2355

2361

2133

2331,2358

2363

2203

2154,2383

2353

2148,2188

2355

2362

2141

Salnsllng

Sansui

Sanyo

ScanMagic

Schaub Lorenz

Schneider

Scientific Labs

Scott

Seeltech

SEG

Sharp

Shinsonic

Sigmatek

Silva

Singer

Skymaster

Skyworth

Slim Art

SM Electronic

Sonic Blue

Sontech

Sony

Soundmaster

Soundmax

Spectra

Spectroniq

Standard

Star Cluster

Starmedia

Sungale

Sunkai

Superscan

Supervision

Sylvania

2000,

2113,

2200,

2264,

2294,

2073,

2362

2134,

2186

2362

2176

2355

2161,

2364

2161,

2006,

2182,

2231,

2245

2359,

2356

2354,

2325,

2356

2362

2355

2133

2366

2004,

2014,

2027,

2070,

2084,

2171,

22581

2312.

23181

2355

2363

2201

2355

2358,

2204

2362

2150

2355

2012,

2230,

2045,2077,2112,

2114,2115,2151,

2216,2219,2228,

2265,2271,2279,

2303,2329,2365

2145,2354,2355,

2145,2217,2292

2357

2355,2363,2380

2040,2088,2091,

2194,2220,2221,

2236,2293,2340

2364

2355

2005,2007,2009,

2015,2023,2026,

2052,2068,2069,

2071,2074,2075,

2085,2087,2168,

2208,221012211,

2273,2284,2285,

2313,2314,2315,

2319,2466

2364

2137,2150,2178,

2239

Symphonic

Synn

T.D.E. Systems

Tatung

TCM

Teac

Tec

Technics

Technika

Telefunken

Tensai

Tevion

Theta Digital

Thomson

Tokai

Top Suxess

Toshiba

TRANScontinents

Transonic

Trio

Trutech

TruVision

TSM

Umax

United

Urban Concepts

US Logic

Venturer

Viewmaster

Vocopro

VocoStar

Waitec

Welltech

Westinghouse

Wharfedale

Woxter

Xbox

Xlogic

XMS

Xoro

Yamada

Yamaha

Yamakawa

2108,

2355

2366

2001,

2182,

2149,

2356

2151

2362,

2353

2362

2182,

2157

2183,

2356,

2364

2032,

2048,

2072,

2079,

2218,

2296,

2363,

2367

2362

2242

2359

2364

2361

2367

2159

2245

2149

2364

2206

2207

2364

2382

2063,

2354,

2361,

2156,

2355,

2362

2382

2051,

2056,

2081,

2118,

2363,

223O

2362

2297

2333,

2367

2355,

2188,

2380

2036,

2049,

2073,

2086,

2233,

2369,

2367

2250

2355

2364

2183

2362

2361,

2064,

2082,

2151,

2380

2355,2383

2357

2334,2372

2037,2039,

2054,2055,

2076,2078,

2145,2159,

2256,2259,

2508

2363

2065,2080,

2083,2089,

2323

Yukai

Zenith

2186

2002,2129,2133,2159,

2223

Blu-ray Disc

Denon

Hitachi

JVC

Marantz (US)

Mitsubishi

Onkyo

Panasonic

Philips

Pioneer

Samsung

Sharp

Sony

Toshiba

Yamaha

2452,2500,2501

2460,2461,2463

2472,2473,2475,2478,

2496,2499,2511

2033,2456,2457

2454,2455

2450,2451

2504

2011,2209,2214,2476,

2477,2479

2510

2212,2506

2045,2113,2498

2194,2220,2221,2497,

2502,2503

2075,2453,2458,2459,

2507

2462

2064,2448,2449,2474,

2505

DVR

Bush

Hitachi

Panasonic

Philips

Pioneer

RCA

Samsung

Sharp

Sony

Toshiba

Victor

Yamaha

2110

2090

2066,2067,2093,2116,

2117,2119,2120,2122,

2123

2108,2111

2016,2017,2018,2019,

2092,2094,2095,2109

2105

2113,2219

2088,2091

2084,2085,2087

2086

2475

2089,2118

DVD Recorder

Aspire 2222

Astar 2240

Broksonic 2146

Go Video 2213

Hitachi 2062

Insignia 2002

lrradio 2053

JVC 2100,

LG 2033,

Liteon 2043

Panasonic 2011,

2116,

2121,

Philips 2008,

2147

Pioneer 2017,

Pye 2144

Samsung 2000,

Sansui 2073

Sanyo 2217

Sony 2004,

2068,

2210,

Sylvania 2239

Toshiba 2032,

2049,

Yamaha 2056

2101,2106,2107

2057, 2223,2238

2034, 2058,2062,

2117, 2119,2120,

2123

2044, 2050,2051,

2035

2112,2216

2005, 2007,2052,

2069, 2074,2208,

2211

2036, 2037,2039,

2054, 2055,2076

Cable

ABC 3002,

3067,

3122

ADB 3020

Adelphia 3081

Alcatel 3016

Americast 3124

Amstrad 3022,

Antronix 3065,

Amher 3070

A_on 3098

AT&T 3095

Axis 3098

Bell South 3124

Cable Vision 3092

Cabletenna 3065

Cabletime 3104

3003,3017,3066,

3086,3093,3119,

3098

3070

Cableview 3087

Clearmaster 3127

ClearMax 3127

Clyde Cablevisi0n 3105

Colour Voice 3068

Comcast 3084, 3088, 3117

Comcrypt 3107

Comtronics 3069

Contec 3074

Coohnax 3127

COX 3084

Cryptovision 3110

Director 3084

Eastern 3075

EveNuest 3123

Fidelity 3098

Filnmet 3107

Filnmet Cablecrypt

3111

Filnmet Comcrypt

3111

Finlux 3097

FIOS 3005

Focus 3126

Foxtel 3022

France Telecom 3100, 3101

Freebox 3023

GC Electronics 3070

GE 3066, 3093

G EC 3105

Gemini 3072, 3123

General Instrument

3017, 3025, 3066, 3084,

3090, 3096, 3117

Goldstar 3120

Gooding 3099

Grundig 3098, 3099

Hamlin 3073, 3078

Hirschmann 3097

Hitachi 3066

HomeChoice 3106

Humax 3021, 3080, 3083

ITT Nokia 3097

Jasco 3123

Jerrold 3017, 3018, 3025, 3066,

3072, 3084, 3090, 3096,

3119, 3123

JVC 3099

Kabel Deutschland

3024, 3027, 3121

Mac ab 310 l

Magnavox 3079

Maspro 3099

Matsui 3099

MegaCable 3117

Memorex 3076,

Minerva 3099

Mnet 3107

Motorola 3025,

3090,

Movie Time 3077,

Mr Zapp 3101

Multichoice 3107

Multitech 3127

NEC 3064

NET Brazil 3085

Nokia 3097

Noos 3101

NSC 3077

Oak 3074

Pace 3006,

Palladium 3099

Panasonic 3112,

Paragon 3122

Philips 3068,

3100,

Pioneer 3001,

3114,

3122

3026,3084,3088,

3095,3117

3109

3089,3121

3118,3122

3071,3079,3099,

3101,3103

3006,3094,3098,

3116,3120

3127

3031,3087,3118

3089,3114,3120

3001,3002,3003,

3028,3029,3081,

3089,3094,3095,

Popular Mechanics

3126

Proscan 3066, 3093

Pulsar 3122

PVP Stereo Visual Matrix

3018

Quasar 3122

RadioShack 3123,

RCA 3030,

Realistic 3070

Recoton 3126

Regal 3078

Regency 3075

Rembrandt 3066

Runco 3122

Sagem 3101

Samsung 3069,

SAT 3098

Scientific Atlanta 3000,

3006,

3086,

3108

Signal 3072,3123

Signature 3066

Sony 3092,3125

Sprucer 3118

Standa_t Component

3115

Starcom

Stargate

Starquest

Supercable

Supermax

Tele+l

TELENET

Telepiu

Thomson

TIME WARNER

Tocom

Worx

Toshiba

Tristar

Tndi

Tnsa

TV86

Unika

United Cable

Universal

Universum

Verizon Fios

Videoway

View Star

Viewmaster

Vision

Visiopass

Vortex View

Wittenberg

Zenith

Zentek

3017,3072,3119,3123

3072,3123

3090

3127

3107,3111

3004

3107

3082,3091

3084

3067

3017

3122

3127

3102

3072,3123

3077

3065,3070

3018,3119

3065,3070

3097,3099

3127

3007

3019

3074,3077,3079

3127

3097,3100,3101

3127

3098

3113,3122,3124

3126

Satellite

AB Sat

AccessHD

ADB

AGS

Akai

Alba

AMes

4216, 4217

4104

4220

4216

4053,4055

4001, 4004, 4006, 4007,

4062, 4217

4005,4007,4010

Allsat

Allsonic

Alltech

Alpha

Alpha Digital

Alphastar

Amitronica

Amstrad

Anglo

Ankaro

Anttron

Apollo

Armstrong

Artec

Asat

ASLF

Astacom

Astra

Astro

AudioTon

Aurora

Austar

Axiel

Axis

BBK

Best

Blaupunkt

Blue Sky

Boca

Boston

Brain Wave

Broadcast

Broco

BSkyB

Bubu Sat

Bush

Cambridge

Canal Satellite

Canal+

CaptiveWorks

Channel Master

Chaparral

CHEROKEE

Chess

CityCom

Clatronic

CNT

4048,

4005,

4217

4053

4104

4077

4217

4011,

4217

4005,

4001,

4001

4011,

4100

4053,

4217

4216

4009,

4219

4004,

4024,

4004,

4222,

4216

4008,

4205

4008,

4015

4217

4011,

4216

4013

4012

4217

4035,

4216

4217

4006,

4218

4213

4099

4007,

4075

4216

4212,

4006,

4013

4010

4053,4055

4008,4024

4035,4217,4218

4008,4024,4217

4004

4053

4055

4011,4054,4217,

4008,4010,4015,

4213,4218,4219

4048

4246

4009,4024,4050

4024

4054,4059,4217

4041

4045

4110

4217

4215,4219

Comae

Commlink

Comtech

Condor

Connexions

Conrad

Conrad Electronic

Contec

Coolsat

Cosat

Coship

Crown

Daeryung

Daewoo

DDC

Delega

Dew

Diamond

Digiality

Digital Stream

DIRECTV

Discoverer

Discovery

Diseqc

Dish Network

Dishpro

Distrisat

Ditristrad

DNT

Drake

DStv

Dune

Echostar

Einhell

Elap

Elekta

Elsat

Elta

4080,

4086

4005

4050

4008,

4014,

4024,

4217,

4050

4096

4048

4109

4011

4014

4057,

4007

4050

4051

4219

4105

4056,

4070,

4116,

4123,

4194,

4198,

4202,

4221

4212

4216

4018,

4094,

4018,

4053

4048

4014,

4072

4222,

4024,

4014,

4117,

4001,

4218

4216,

4010

4217

4001,

4053,

4081,4082,4083,

4024, 4219

4024

4215,4218,4219

4219

4217

4064,4067,4068,

4071,4074,4107,

4119,4121,4122,

4127,4192,4193.

4195,4196,4197.

4199,4200,4201,

4203,4206,4207.

4065,4089,4092,

4095, 4117

4117

4053,4055

4246

4240, 4242

4018,4065,4089,

4217

4005,4011,4217,

4217

4008, 4024, 4048,

4055

Emanon 400 l

Emme Esse 4008, 4024

Engel 4217

Ep Sat 4006

EURIEULT 4031

Eurodec 4052

Europa 4053, 4218, 4219

Europhon 4219

Eurosat 4011

Eurosky 4008, 4011,4215, 4218,

4219, 4024

Eurostar 4011, 4215, 4219

Eutelsat 4217

Exator 4001, 4004

Expressvu 4117

Fenner 4024, 4212, 4217

Ferguson 4006, 4052, 4214

Fidelity 4218

Finlandia 4006

Finlux 4006

FinnSat 4050, 4052

Flair Mate 4217

Foxtel 4204, 4222, 4244, 4245,

4246, 4247

Freecom 4001, 4049, 4218

FFEmaximal 4024, 4217

Fuba 4001, 4008, 4014, 4015,

4024, 4055, 4215

Galaxis 4005, 4008, 4009, 4024,

4048, 4050, 4215, 4222,

4246

GE 4066, 4093, 4111,4197

General Instrument

4019, 4073

GMI 4011

GOI 4117

Goktbox 4213

GoldStar 4049

Goodmans 4002, 4006, 4029

Goodmind 4111

Grandin 4031

Grothusen 4001, 4049

Grundig 4004, 4006, 4015, 4035,

4211, 4218, 4222, 4246

H_insel & Gretel 4219

Hantor 4001, 4013

H:muri 4010

Hauppauge 4044

Heliocom 4219

Helium 4219

Hinari

Hirschmann

Hisawa

Hisense

Hitachi

Homecast

Houston

HTS

Hughes

4007

4015,4024,4210,4216,

4218, 4219

4013

4016

4006,4114,4199,4203

4084,4085,4087

4048

4117

4064, 4068, 4192, 4194,

4196, 4202

Hughes Network Systems

4071

Hulnax

Huth

Hypson

Ilo

hnex

Innovation

Insignia

Intertronic

Intervision

ITT Nokia

Jerrold

Johansson

JOK

JSR

JVC

Kamm

Kathrein

Kathrein Eurostar

Klap

Konig

Kosmos

Kreiselmeyer

K-SAT

Kyostar

L&S Electronic

Lasat

Lasonic

Lenco

Leng

Lennox

Lenson

4025,4030,4060,4097

4005, 4011, 4012, 4013,

4048,4050,4219,4223

4031

4016

4031

4008

4107

4011

4048,4219

4006

4019

4013

4216

4048

4029, 4065, 4089, 4117

4217

4015,4034, 4042, 4053,

4055, 4063, 4215, 4216,

4217

4215

4216

4219

4049

4004

4015

4217

4001

4024

4008,4010,4024,4054,

4212,4215,4219

4108

4001, 4024, 4049, 4215,

4217, 4219

4013

4048

4218

Lexns

Lifesat

Lifetec

Lorenzen

Lorraine

Lupus

Luxor

Lyonnaise

Macab

Magnavox

Manata

Manhattan

Marantz

Mascom

Maspro

Matsui

Max

Mediabox

Mediamarkt

Mediasat

Medion

Medison

Mega

Menlorex

Metronic

Metz

Micro electronic

Micro Technology

MicroGem

Micromaxx

Microstar

Microtec

Minerva

Mitsnbishi

Mitsumi

Morgan's

Motorola

Multichoice

Multitec

Muratto

Mysat

Navex

Neuhaus

Neusat

Next Level

NextWave

4053

4049,

4008,

4008

4219

4049

4008,

4218

4052

4127,

4031,

4006,

4055

4010

4006,

4216

4219

4213

4011

4009,

4008,

4217

4053,

4127

4001,

4028,

4015

4217,

4217

4106

4008,

4008

4217

4015

4006,

4054

4011,

4217

4019,

4222,

4212

4049

4217

4013

4009,

4219

4217

4019

4223

4103,4107

4024,4212,4217

4024

4101

4216,4217

4010,4048,4216

4217

4213,4218

4024,4217

4055

4004,4005,4010,

4031, 4217

4218,4219

4024

4015, 4202

4053,4054,4055,

4088,4090,4091

4246

4048,4217,4218,

Nikko

Nokia

Nordmende

Nova

Novis

Oceanic

Octagon

Okano

Optex

Optns

Orbitech

OSat

Otto Versand

Pace

Pacific

Packsat

Palcom

Palladium

Palsat

Panasat

Panasonic

Panda

Pansat

Patriot

Paysat

PCT

Philco

Philips

Phoenix

Phonotrend

Pioneer

Polsat

Predki

Premiere

Priesner

Primestar

Profile

Promax

Prosat

Proscan

Protek

Proton

Provision

4011,

4006,

4001,

4052

4222

4013

4051

4001,

4011

4048

4204,

4246

4001,

4004

4015

4006,

4047,

4051

4216

4007

4011,

4212,

4222,

4006,

4124,

4006,

4125

4216

4127

4110

4101

4006,

4061,

4196,

4206,

4050

4006,

4046,

4052

4013

4048,

4011

4076

4216

4006

4005,

4066,

4051

4016

4010

4217

4040

4006,4007,4010,

4004, 4050

4213,4222,4223,

4212, 4213, 4218

4015,4035,4043,

4204,4216,4243

4218

4246

4035,4036,4121,

4126,4198,4221

4219

4033,4053,4055,

4068,4071,4127,

4201, 4202,4203,

4213, 4216

4005, 4048

4213

4007

4093, 4122, 4197

Quadral

Quelle

Quiero

RadioShack

Radiola

Radix

Rainbow

RCA

Realistic

Redpoint

Redstar

RFT

Roadstar

Roch

Rover

Saba

Sabre

Sagem

Sakura

Samsung

SAT

Sat Cruiser

Sat Partner

Sat Team

Satcom

Satec

Satelco

SattUrd

Satmaster

Satplus

Schneider

Schwaiger

SCS

Seelnann

SEG

Seleco

Servi Sat

Siemens

Silva

Skantin

Skardin

Skinsat

SKR

Sky Italia

4005,

4024

4015,

4052

4019

4053,

4014,

4004

4066,

4116,

4122,

4078

4009

4008,

4005,

4217

4031

4024,

4010,

4006

4023,

4050

4000,

4064,

4123,

4007,

4223

4001,

4049,

4217

4012,

4217

4024

4012

4212

4008,

4051,

4215

4009,

4001,

4048

4031,

4015

4049

4217

4009

4218

4217

4204

4007,4008,4216,

4215,4219

4055

4037

4093,4112,4113,

4118,4119,4197,

4207

4024

4053,4055

4217

4215,4216,4219

4052

4001,4003,4032,

4069,4071,4120,

4196,4200

4218

4004,4010,4013,

4218

4219

4212,4216

4212,4219

4011,4014

4008,4013,4024

4217

Skymaster

Skymax

SkySat

Skyvision

SM Electronic

Smart

Sony

Star Choice

Starland

Starring

Start Trak

Strong

STS

STVI

Sumida

Sunny Sound

Sunsat

Sunstar

Supermax

Tandberg

Tandy

Tantec

TCM

Techniland

TechniSat

Technology

Technosat

Technowelt

Teco

Tehmor

Telasat

Telecom

Teleflmken

Teleka

Telemaster

TELENET

Telesat

Telestar

Televes

Telewire

Tempo

Tevion

4005,4017, 4022, 4212,

4217

4053, 4055

4212,4217,4218,4219

4048

4212,4217

4215, 4217

4067,4070,4213

4011,4054

4019

4217

4013

4001

4001, 4004,4008,4024,

4049,4222,4246

4115

4031

4011

4024

4217

4011, 4024, 4054

4223

4052

4004

4006

4008

4012

4014,4021,4026,4027,

4038, 4039, 4053, 4212,

4213, 4218

4222

4223

4219

4011,4054

4007

4215, 4219

4217

4001, 4017, 4216

4004,4011,4014,4218,

4219

4010

4241

4219

4212, 4213, 4218

4006, 4218

4048

4223

4008, 4217

Thomson 4006,

4208,

4217,

Thorens 4051

Thorn 4006

Tivax 4104

Tivo 4196

Tokai 4053

Tonna 4006,

4218

Toshiba 4194,

Triad 4049

Triasat 4218

Triax 4015,

Turnsat 4217

Tvonics 4214

Twinner 4031,

UEC 4204,

Uher 4212

UltimateTV 4070

Uniden 4079,

Unisat 4011,

Unitor 4013

Universum 4015,

US Digital 4016

V:triosat 4015

Vega 4024

Ventana 4053,

Viewsat 4098

Visiosat 4013,

Voom 4019

Vortec 4001

Welltech 4212

WeTeKom 4212,

Wevasat 4006

Wewa 4006

Winersat 4013

Wisi 4006,

4219

Woorisat 4010

Worktsat 4216

Xrypton 4024

XSat 4217

Zehnder 4008,

4024

Zenith 4102,

Zodiac 4004

4020,4052,4058,

4213,4215,4216,

4219

4012,4048,4217,

4202,4203

4215,4217,4218

4217

4222,4246

4127

4050,4053

4215,4219

4055

4048,4216,4217

4218

4014,4015,4218,

4209,4010,4215,

4107, 4195

Yamaha

5082,5095,5114

CD Recorder

Yamaha 5083

Yamaha

5080,5081,5086

Tape

Yamaha 5084, 5087

Tuner

Yamaha

5066,5085,5088,5090,

5092

Yamaha 2080

Amplifier

Yamaha 5019,5020,5098

Apple TV

Apple 2241

"Apple TV"is atrademark orregisteredmark

of Apple Inc.

YAMAHA CORPORATION

@YAMA

Supplement for Pandora

The Pandora service is available in the U.S.A. only.

Le service Pandora est disponible aux Etats-Unis uniquement.

Pandora is a free, personalized Internet radio service

playing only music you love. Enter your favorite artists or

tracks and Pandora will bring an effortless personal

soundtrack into your living room. Rate tracks as they

play, because Pandora caters to your tastes and adapts

stations to your feedback on the spot.

Since all Pandora accounts are portable, you can

always access your own personalized Pandora stations

from any computer or device in the United States that

supports Pandora. Pandora is only available within the

United States due to licensing restrictions.

Pandora is always free, with the option to upgrade to

Pandora One which is completely free of all advertising

and comes with additional features.

For more information, http://www.pandora.com

• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet. For

detail on connections and network settings, refer to "Owner's

Manual".

• The actualdisplaymaybe partlydifferentfromdisplayimagesused

on this documentdepending on the model.

Account setup for Pandora

If you have not set up your Pandora account yet, the

account setup screen appears when you select

"Pandora". To start using the Pandora service on the

unit, follow the procedure below to set up your Pandora

account.

• You can register up to eight Pandora accounts on the unit. For

details, see "Editing the Pandora accounts" (p.4).

Press NET repeatedly to select "Pandora"

as the input source.

The following screen is displayed on the TV if

you have not set up your Pandora account on

the unit yet.

If you have a Pandora account, use the

cursor keys to select "YES" and press

ENTER.

If you do not have a Pandora account, use

the cursor keys to select "NO" and press

ENTER.

Perform the following procedure.

If you select "YES" in Step 2

(_) Press ENTER to enter the email address entry

screen.

(_) Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter your

Pandora account email address and select "OK".

Toclear the entry, select "CLEAR"

(_) Press ENTER to enter the password entry screen.

@ Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter your

Pandora password and select "OK".

The following screen appears if you have

successfully logged into your account.

• Ifthe error screen appears, Iogin has failed. In this case, read

the on-screen message and start all over again.

(_) Press ENTER.

If you select "NO" in Step 2

(_) Write down the URL and active code shown in the

TV.

(_) Use a web browser on your PC to access the URL

and follow the on-screen instruction to register for a

Pandora account.

(_) After activation, press ENTER to log in with your

new Pandora account.

En 1

Creating Pandora stations 3

Pandora lets you create up to 1O0 custom radio stations

that play only music you love. Just type in your favorite

track or artist and Pandora will create a station that

plays similar music.

• If there are no Pandora stations in your account, the "Create

Station" screen appears automatically. In this case, proceed to

Step 4 and create Pandora stations.

Press NET repeatedly to select "Pandora"

as the input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

Use the cursor keys to select "Create

Station" and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter

the name of an artist or a track (all or part

of the name) and select "Search".

The auto-complete list will appear on the right

side of the screen during the name entry. If you

select an artist or a track from the list, it will be

added to your Pandora stations. The playback of

the selected station starts automatically and the

playback screen is displayed.

To close the "Create Station" screen and return

to the browse screen, press RETURN.

(_) Use the cursor keys to select a desired item and

press ENTER.

The selected item is added to your Pandora

stations. The playback starts automatically and the

playback screen is displayed.

If either artists or tracks are found

Use the cursor keys to select a desired item and press

ENTER.

The selected item is added to your Pandora stations.

The playback starts automatically and the playback

screen is displayed.

If only one item is found

In this case, the item found is automatically added to

your Pandora stations. The playback starts

automatically and the playback screen is displayed.

If no items are found

Press ENTER and repeat Step 4 to try another

keyword.

• To return to the browse screen, press RETURN.

• If playback of any Pandora station is ongoing, the playback

screen is displayed. Press RETURN to display the browse

screen.

2 Use the cursor keys to select "[]" and

press ENTER.

5 Perform the following procedure.

If both artists and tracks are found

(_) Use the cursor keys to select "ARTISTS" or

"TRACKS" and press ENTER.

2 En

Playback of Pandora stations

If you have created Pandora stations, follow the

procedure below to select a Pandora station to be

played.

Press NET repeatedly to select "Pandora"

as the input source.

The browse screen (My Station list) is displayed

on the TV.

• If playback of any Pandora station is ongoing, the playback

screen is displayed.

• If you have not signed in, the account list screen is displayed.

Use the cursor keys to select your Pandora account and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select a Pandora

station and press ENTER.

Playback of the selected station starts and the

playback screen is displayed.

• Browse screen

Playback indicators (play/pause)

My Station list

Displays tile list of Pandora stations. Use tile cursor keys

(,'/)toselectaPandorastationandpressENTERtostart

playback.

A speaker icon indicates the station currently played back.

Item number/total

Feedback indicator

Displays your feedback (thumb up/down) for tile current

track. You can give feedback for the track in the playback

screen.

Operation menu

Press tile cursor key ( ) and then use tile cursor keys (_/_)

to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

Creates a new Pandora station. For

Create

Station details, see "Creating Pandora stations"

[] (1°'2)

Delete Delete the Pandora station selected in

Station the list.

[]

Moves to the previous/next page of the

list.

Moves to 10 pages forward/backward.

Moves to the playback screen.

• Submenus available in "[]" vary depending on the selected item.

• Playback screen

@ @

@ Playback indicators (play/pause)

Playback information

Displays tile station name, album name, track title and

elapsed/total time.

0 Feedback indicator

Displaysyour feedback (thumb up/down) for tile current track.

0 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (;) and then use the cursor keys (_/_)

to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

Gives positive feedback (thumb up)

for the current track.

Gives negative feedback (thumb

[] down) for the current track and skip to

the next track.

Bookmark Adds the current track to your

bookmarks on your Pandora profile

this track

page at "http://www.pandora.com".

Adds the current artist to your

Bookmark

bookmarks on your Pandora profile

this artist

page at "http://www.pandora.com".

Tired of Requests not to play back the current

track for a month and skip to the next

this track

track.

Why this Display the information why this track

track? is selected.

• You can also use the external device operation keys (_,,'%I, II,

D.-_4)on the remote control to control playback.

• All functions are not available during advertisement broadcast.

En 3

• Switching information on the front

display

Press INFO.

Each time you press the key, the displayed item

changes.

Display items

Track (track title), Station (station name), Album (album

name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio

Decoder (decoder name)

Editing the Pandora accounts

You can register up to 8 Pandora accounts on the unit.

Follow the procedure below to add or remove Pandora

accounts, or switch to another Pandora account.

Press OPTION.

2 Perform the following procedure.

To add a new Pandora account

Use the cursor keys (A/V) to select "Add Account"

and press ENTER.

_5 Follow from Step 2 of "Account setup for Pandora"

(p.1).

To remove a Pandora account

Use the cursor keys( / )toselect"Remove

Account" and press ENTER.

_5 Use the cursor keys to select a Pandora account to

be removed and press ENTER.

(_) Use the cursor keys to select "OK" and press

ENTER.

To switch to another Pandora account

(_) Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select '<Switch User"

and press ENTER.

_5 Use the cursor keys to select a Pandora account to

be used and press ENTER.

The browse screen (My Station list) for the selected

Pandora account is displayed.

Pandora and Pandora Internet Radio logo are registered

trademarks or trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc. in the United

States and/or other countries.

YAMAHA COP-,POP-,ATION

QuickGuidefor Multi-zoneand RemoteControlFunctions

What is the multi-zone function?

The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room

where the unit is installed (main zone) and in another room (Zone2). For example, while

you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person can listen to radio in

the study room (Zone2).

!i!...................................

Study room (Zone2)

Living room (main zone)

You can select the following input sources for Zone2:

• Analog audio input • SERVER

(AV 5-6, AUDIO 1-2, V-AUX [RX-A830 only]) • AirPlay

• TUNER (FM/AM radio) • Network streaming services

• USB (including iPod) (available on some models)

• Audiosourcesinput fromthe HDMIor digitalaudioinputjacks cannotbe outputto Zone2.

• AirPlayis availableinZone2 onlywhen Airplayplaybackis ongoinginthe main zone.

This guide explains how to set up a Zone2 system using the unit's internal amplifier.

This will enable you to use the 5.1-channel speaker system in the main zone and

2-channel speaker system in Zone2 simultaneously. (When Zone2 output is disabled,

you can use the 7.1-channel speaker system in the main zone.)

For more information, refer to the Owner's Manual in the supplied CD-ROM.

• The illustrations of the main unit and remote control may be different from the actual product depending

on the model.

Preparations

• Connection overview

Main zone

Already connected

(refer to Easy Setup Guide)

Zone2

Speakers

Already connected

(refer to Easy Setup Guide)

BD/DVD player

• For information on how to connect speakers or a TV in the main zone, refer to the Easy Setup Guide.

• Connections 2

Caution

• Before connecting the speakers, remove the unit's power cable from the AC wall outlet.

• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch each other or come into contact with the

unit's metal areas. This may damage the unit or the speakers.

• Connect the speakers with the correct polarity.

Connect the speaker in Zone2 to the EXTRA SP terminals with

speaker cables.

The type of the speaker terminals varies depending on the model.

EXTRA SP terminals

The unit (rear)

Connect the playback devices (such as BD/DVD players and CD

players) in the main zone to the analog stereo input jacks with stereo

pin cables.

Only analog audio sources (including FM/AM radio), and USB and network

sources can be output to Zone2. To listen to the playback of an external device

in Zone2, you need to connect the device to the analog audio input jacks.

The unit (rear)

AV 5-6 jacks

AUDIO 1-2 jacks BD/DVD player

CD player

Connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet.

To operate the unit and external devices from Zone2

You can operate the unit and external devices from Zone2 using the supplied remote

control if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit's REMOTE IN/OUT

jacks. For details, refer to the Owner's Manual in the supplied CD-ROM.

Left

(Rotate-type)

Right

Speakers (Zone2)

(Push-type)

+ (red)

• Zone2 setup

Use the supplied remote control to set the Zone2

function.

1 Turn on the unit and TV.

2 Switch the TV input to display video from

the unit.

3 Press ON SCREEN to display the

on-screen menu on the TV.

ON SCREEN

ENTER

4 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select

"Setup" --> "Speaker" --> "Manual Setup"

--> "Power Amp Assign".

5 Use the cursor keys to select

"7ch +1ZONE" and press ENTER.

6 Press ON SCREEN to exit from the

on-screen menu.

Controlling Zone2

Followthe procedure below to enable Zone2 output and

select an input source for Zone2.

1 Set MAIN/ZONE2 to "ZONE2".

This changes the zone (main zone or Zone2)

that is controlled by the remote control.

AV 5-6

AUDIO 1-2

USB

NET

MAIN/ZONE2

Press RECEIVER _.

Each time you press the key, Zone2 output is

enabled or disabled.

When Zone2 output is enabled, "ZONE2" lights

up in the front display.

Use the following keys to select an input

source.

AV 5-6: AV 5-6 (AUDIO) jacks

AUDIO 1-2: AUDIO 1-2 jacks

V-AUX: (RX-A830 only)

VIDEO AUX (AUDIO) jacks (on the front panel)

TUNER: FM/AM radio

USB: USB jack (on the front panel)

NET: NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to

select a desired network source)

• You cannot select USB and network sources exclusively for

each zone. For example, if you select "SERVER" for Zone2

when "USB" is selected for the main zone, the input source for

the main zone also switches to "SERVER".

4 Start playback on the external device or

select a radio station.

For details about the playback operation, refer to

the instruction manual for the external device or

Owner's Manual on the supplied CD-ROM.

SOURCE

operation keys

TV ©

CODE SET

By registering the remote control code for your TV, you can operate it with the remote control of the unit.

For information on how to register remote control codes for other external devices, refer to Owner's Manual in the supplied CD-ROM.

Registering the remote control code

1 Use "Remote Control Code Search" in the supplied

CD-ROM to find your TV's remote control code.

• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If

that does not work, try the other codes.

2 Press CODE SET.

SOURCE blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 2.

Press TV @.

Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote

control code.

Once the remote control code is successfully registered, SOURCE

blinks twice.

If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.

TV operations

Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you

can control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input

source selected on the unit.

TV operation keys

INPUT

MUTE

TV VOL

TV CH

TV do

Switches the video inputs of the TV.

Mutes the audio output of the TV.

Adjust the volume of the TV.

Switch the channels of the TV

Turns on/off the TV.

YAMAHA COP, POP,ATION

Supplement for Web Control

You can control the unit with the web control screen displayed in a web browser.

Web browser

Web control _ Web control

Router The unit

Note

• If you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of the unit may change each time the unit is turned on.

• If you have enabled the MAC address filter, you need to specify the MAC address of your PC to allow

the PC to access the unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC, refer to its

instruction manual.

• If you are using Windows 8, we recommend you start Internet Explorer in the following way.

- Select "Desktop" in the Start screen and click the Intemet Explorer icon at the bottom left of the

screen.

• By using the application for smartphone/tablet "AV CONTROLLER", you can control the unit from an

iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices. Visit the Yamaha website for details.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the network properly.

• Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of the unit to your PC. In these

cases, configure the security software appropriately.

• To display the web control screen or turn on the unit from the web control when the unit is in standby

mode, set "Network Standby" (p.3) to "On".

• We recommend using one of the following web browsers.

- Internet Explorer 8.x, 9.x or 10.x

- Safari 6.x

Start the web browser.

Enter the IP address of the unit in the address bar of the web

browser.

(Example)

I • Items available on the web control screen vary depending on the model. I

• You can check the IP address of the unit in "Network" in the "Information" menu.

• You can bookmark the unit's IP address in the browser or create a shortcut link (p.3) to access the

web control screen quickly in the future.

En 1

Top menu screen _ Control screen

@ CONTROL

Moves to the control screen for the selected zone.

@ STATUS

Turns on/off tile power for each zone or displays tile input source and volume set for each zone.

@ SETTINGS

Moves to the settings screen.

@ PARTY MODE

(Not available on some models)

Turns on/off the party mode.

@ SYSTEM POWER

Turns on/off the power for all zones.

@ MAIN VOLUME

Adjusts tile volume or mutes the audio output for tile main zone. You can also select tile

increments used for volume adjustment.

@ RELOAD

Reloads the current status of the unit.

@ PLAYINFO

Selects an input source or controls playback for tile selected zone.

@TOP MENU

Moves to tile top menu screen.

@ SCENE

Selects a scene for the selected zone (only for the main zone on some models).

@ POWER

Turns on/off the power for the selected zone.

@ VOLUME

Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You can also select the

increments used for volume adjustment.

@ RELOAD

Reloads the current status of tile unit.

• Multi-zone volume adjustment is not available when an external amplifier is used.

• The number of available zones varies depending on the model.

En 2

@ Settings screen

@ Rename

Edits the network name (the unit's name on the network) or the name of each zone. Click "APPLY"

to apply the changes to the unit.

IP Address

Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). Click "APPLY" to apply tile changes to

the unit.

MAC Filter

Sets tile MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from tile network devices. Click "APPLY" to

apply the changes to the unit.

Auto Reload

Enables/disables automatic reloading. When "Auto Reload" is "On" (enabled), the web control

screen reloads the status of the unit every 5 seconds.

Network Standby

Enables/disables tile network standby function.

Backup/Recovery

Creates a backup of the unit's settings on tile PC or restores tile settings from the backup.

Firmware Update

Updates the firmware of tile unit by using the firmware you have downloaded on the PC.

Follow the on-screen instructions to start the firmware update.

Create Link

Creates a shortcut link to tile desired control screen.

Tips

Displays tips for use of tile web control.

@ BACK

Moves to tile top menu screen.

@ RELOAD

Reloads the current status of the unit.

• When using the MAC address filter, make sure you specify the MAC addresses of your network

devices correctly. Otherwise, the unit will be inaccessible from your network devices such as PCs and

other external devices.

• Do not operate the unit during the recovery process, as this may result in the incorrect recovery of the

settings. When the recovery finishes, click "OK" to set the unit to standby mode.

• The backup does not contain user information (such as user account and password) or unit-specific

information (such as MAC address and IP address).

• Windows, Intemet Explorer are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in

the United States and/or other countries.

• Safari is a trademark of Apple Inc.

YAMAHA CORPORATION

Supplement for Rhapsody

The Rhapsody ® service is available in the U.S.A. only.

Le service Rhapsody ® est disponible aux Etats-Unis uniquement.

Prohibition

• It is strictly prohibited to modify, reproduce, reverse-engineer or

use this unit and/or built-in software for use other than

audiovisual purposes.

The Rhapsody ® service is the power behind the

Rhapsody ® Media Player (the Rhapsody ® player software

that you can download to your computer). Rhapsody ®

service supplies the music, keeps My Library up to date,

provides you with Rhapsody ® channels, the Playlist Central

online community, and manages your downloads. Your

software connects to Rhapsody ® service through the

internet= Because your account information and Rhapsody ®

content are on servers instead of any individual computer,

your music is infinitely portable. Much of what you see in the

Display area comes from Rhapsody ® service. What you can

do with Rhapsody ® service depends on your subscription.

You can use Rhapsody ® service for free, or get even more

from a paid membership. The Rhapsody ® service also

brings you Rhapsody ® Online, a streamlined, internet

version of Rhapsody ® that you can access from almost

anywhere. Just sign in to your Rhapsody ® account to start

letting the Rhapsody ® service work for you=

For more information, http://www=rhapsody=com/

• To usethis function,this unit must be connectedto the Internet.For

detailon connectionsand networksettings, referto "Owner's

Manual".

• If anyerrormessageappearsonthe frontdisplay,see"Error

indicationsonthe front display" in"Owner'sManual".

• The actualdisplaymay bepartly differentfromdisplayimagesused

on this documentdepending on the model.

Rhapsody _ account sign-in

If you have not signed in to your Rhapsody account yet,

the sign-in screen appears when you select

"Rhapsody". To start using the Rhapsody service on this

unit, follow the procedure below to sign in to your

Rhapsody account.

1 Press NET repeatedly to select

"Rhapsody" as the input source.

The following screen is displayed on the TV if

you have not signed in to your Rhapsody

account yet.

Read the description and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (_/v) to select "Sign

In" and press ENTER.

To get started with a 30-day free trial, select

"Rhapsody Trial" and register for a trial account

in the specified website.

4 Press ENTER to enter the user name entry

screen.

S Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter

your user name and select "OK".

• To clear the entry, select "CLEAR".

Press ENTER to enter the password entry

screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter

your password and select "OK".

The following screen appears if you have

successfully logged into your account.

• If sign-in failed, the error screen appears. In this case, read

the on-screen message and start all over again.

Press ENTER.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

En 1

Playback of Rhapsody _ contents

Follow the procedure below to operate the Rhapsody

contents and start playback.

1 Press NET repeatedly to select

"Rhapsody" as the input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

Rhapsody Music Select a song from the lists organized

Guide by category (artist, album, etc).

Select a network radio channel from tile

Rhapsody Radio lists of the channels provided by

Rhapsody.

Use the software keyboard to search

Search tile desired item (artist, album, etc.) by

keyword.

Select a track from items (artist, album,

My Library etc.) added to "My Library".

• If playback of any Rhapsody content is ongoing, the playback

screen is displayed.

2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and

press ENTER.

If a song or a radio channel is selected, playback

starts and the playback screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• Browse screen

Status indicators

Display tile current shuffle/repeat settings and playback

status (play/pause).

List name

Contents list

Displays the list of Rhapsody contents. Use the cursor keys

to select an item and press ENTERto confirm the selection.

Item number/total

Operation menu

Use tile cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to

confirm tile selection.

To close tile submenu, press RETURN.

Starts playback of the selected song/

Play album or radio channel.

Add track

Adds tile song selected in the list to

to My "My Library".

Library

Utility

Add album

Adds tile album selected in the list to

to My "My Library".

Library

Add CH to Adds tile Rhapsody Radio channel

My Library selected in tile list to "My Library".

1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the

1 Page Down list.

10 Pages Up

10 Pages Down

Return

Moves to 10 pages forward/backward.

Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Closes the screen display and shows

Screen Off the background. Press one of the

menu operation keys to redisplay it.

• By adding your favorite Rhapsody contents to "My Library", you can

access to them quickly from "My Library". To remove items from "My

Library", select the item in 'My Library" and then 'Remove from My

Library" in "Utility".

• Submenus available in "Utility" vary depending on the list.

En 2

• Playback screen

@ Status indicators

Display tile current shuffle/repeat settings and playback

status (play/pause).

@ Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title and

elapsed/total time.

Use the cursor keys to select information to be scrolled.

@ Album image

@ Operation menu

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to

confirm tile selection.

To close tile submenu, press RETURN.

Add track

to My Adds the current song to "My Library".

Library

Utility

Add alburn

Adds the current album to "My

to My Library".

Library

Resumes playback from pause.

I Stops playback.

Play II Stops playback temporarily.

Control

Skips forward/backward.

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Closes tile screen display and shows

Screen Off tile background. Press one of tile

menu operation keys to redisplay it.

• You can also use the external device operation keys (m,,,%l, II,

_,_ t,,_,_) on the remote control to control playback.

• Some playback controls are not available during Rhapsody radio

channel playback.

• Shuffle/repeat settings

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for

playback of Rhapsody contents.

1 When "Rhapsody" is selected as the input

source, press OPTION.

2 See "Playing back music stored on media

servers (PCs/NAS)" in "Owner's Manual"

to configure the settings.

• Switching information on the front

display

1 Press INFO.

Each time you press the key, the display item

switches.

Display items

Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album

(album name), DSP Program (sound mode

name), Audio Decoder (decoder name)

Removing the Rhapsody account

Follow the procedure below to remove your Rhapsody

account from this unit.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select "Input" and

press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (_/>) to select

"Rhapsody" and press the cursor key (_).

4 Use the cursor keys (_,/v) to select

"Remove Account" and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select "OK" and

press ENTER.

Your Rhapsody account is removed from this

unit.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

• Checking the registration status of

the Rhapsody account

To check the registration status of your Rhapsody

account, follow "Removing the Rhapsody account" and

select "Account Status" in step 4.

Rhapsody

Rhapsody and the Rhapsody logo are registered trademarks of

Rhapsody international, inc.

En 3

@YAMAHA

YAMAHA CORPOP,ATION

@YAMA

Supplement for SiriusXM Internet Radio

• The SiriusXM Internet Radio service is available in the U.S.A.

and Canada. (Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii)

• Categories and channels displayed in the screen may vary

depending on the region.

Over 120 channels of the SiriusXM programming you

love, including commercial-free music plus sports, talk,

news and entertainment. Listen anywhere on your

computer or smartphone.

If you're not a SiriusXM subscriber, you can sign up

today for a PREMIUM SiriusXM Internet Radio

subscription at www.siriusxm.com

<http://www.siriusxm.com/>.

Current subscribers can add a PREMIUM SiriusXM

Internet Radio subscription to an existing account.

For Canadian customers, please contact SiriusXM

Canada at 1-888-539-7474 to subscribe.

• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Intemet. For

detail on connections and network settings, refer to "Owner's

Manual".

• If any error message appears on the front display, see "Error

indications on the front display" in 'Owner's Manual".

• The actual display may be partly different from display images used

on this document depending on the model.

SiriusXM Internet Radio account sign-in

If you have not signed in to your SiriusXM Internet Radio

account yet, the sign-in screen appears when you

select "SiriusXM'. To start using the SiriusXM Internet

Radio service on the unit, follow the procedure below to

• If you want to sign in to your SiriusXM Internet Radio account after

free trial expired, select "Sign In" from the "Input" menu and then

follow from Step 4 of this procedure. For details on the "Input" menu,

see "Configuring input sources (Input menu)" in "Owner's Manual".

Press NET repeatedly to select "SiriusXM"

as the input source.

The following screen is displayed on the TV if

you have not signed in to your SiriusXM Internet

Radio account yet.

Read the description and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (A/V) to select "Sign

In" and press ENTER.

To get started with a 30-day free trial, select

"SiriusXM Internet Radio Trial", read the

on-screen description and then select "OK"

(proceed to Step 8).

For Canadian customers

During the 30 day free trial period you will only have access to

free trial content; even if you have fully subscribed during the trial

period.

After the 30 day free trial period Canadian based Subscribers will

have access to Canadian content.

4 Press ENTER to enter the user name entry

screen.

S Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter

your user name and select "OK".

• To clear the entry, select "CLEAR".

Press ENTER to enter the password entry

screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter

your password and select "OK".

The following screen appears if you have

successfully logged into your account.

• If the error screen appears, sign-in has failed. In this case,

read the on-screen message and start all over again.

Press ENTER.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

En 1

Playback of SiriusXM Internet Radio

contents

Follow the procedure below to operate the SiriusXM

Internet Radio contents and start playback.

Press NET repeatedly to select "SiriusXM"

as the input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• Browse screen

• Playback screen

• If playback of any SiriusXM Internet Radio content is ongoing,

the playback screen is displayed.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and

press ENTER.

If a SiriusXM Internet Radio channel is selected,

playback starts and the playback screen is

displayed.

O Playback indicator

@ List name

0 Contents list

Displays tile SiriusXM Internet Radio contents. Use tile

cursor keys (_/_) to select an item and press ENTER to

confirm the selection.

@ Item number/total

0 Operation menu

Press tile cursor key ( ) and then use tile cursor keys (_/T)

to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Closes the screen display and shows the

Screen Off background. Press one of the menu

operation keys to redisplay it.

Moves to 10 pages forward/backward.

O Playback indicator

0 Playback information

Displays tile channel name, artist name, song title and

elapsed time.

Use the cursor keys (." /_) to select scrollable information.

@ Channel art

0 Operation menu

Press the cursor key()andthenusethecursorkeys(_/_)

to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

Play

Control 1 Stops playback.

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Closes the screen display and shows

Screen

tile background. Press one of the menu

Off

operation keys to redisplay it.

• You can also use the external device operation keys (1=,,%I) on the

remote control to control playback.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

2 En

• Switching information on the front

display

Press INFO.

Each time you press the key, the displayed item

changes.

Display items

Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Channel

(channel name), DSP Program (sound mode

name), Audio Decoder (decoder name)

Removing the SiriusXM Internet

Radio account

Follow the procedure below to remove your SiriusXM

Internet Radio account from the unit.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select "Input" and

press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (<_/{>) to select

"SiriusXM Internet Radio" and press the

cursor key (A).

4 Use the cursor keys (A/V) to select

"Remove Account" and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select "OK" and

press ENTER.

Your SiriusXM Internet Radio account is

removed from the unit.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

• Checking the registration status of

the SiriusXM Internet Radio

account

To check the registration status of your SiriusXM Internet

Radio account, follow "Removing the SiriusXM Internet

Radio account" and select "Account Status" in Step 4.

SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and loges are trademarks of

Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii.

En 3

OYAMAHA

YAMAHA CORPORATION

This product uses the following free software.

For information (copyright, etc) about each software, read the original sentences stated below.

English

About ASN.1 object dumping code

ASN.1 object dumping code, copyright Peter Gutmann

<[email protected]>, based on ASN.1 dump

program by David Kemp <[email protected]>,

with contributions from various people including

Matthew Hamrick <[email protected]>, Bruno Couillard

<[email protected]>, Hallvard Furuseth

<[email protected]>, Geoff Thorpe

<[email protected]>, David Boyce

<[email protected]>, John Hughes

<[email protected]>, Life is hard, and then

you die <[email protected]>, Hans-Olof

Hermansson <[email protected]>, Tor

Rustad <[email protected]>, Kjetil Barvik

<[email protected]>, James Sweeny

<[email protected]>, and several other people

whose names I've misplaced.

This code grew slowly over time without much design or

planning, with features being tacked on as required.

It's not representative of my normal coding style.

About FLAC codec Library

2000, 2001,2002,2003,2004,2005, 2006,2007,2008,2009

Josh Coalson

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with

or without modification, are permitted provided that the

following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above

disclaimer.

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the

above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the

following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other

materials provided with the distribution.

Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the

names of its contributors may be used to endorse or

promote products derived from this software without

specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT

HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,

BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO

EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR

CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,

INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE

GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR

PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER

CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,

WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT

(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING

IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,

EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH

DAMAGE.

About libexpat

Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper

maintainers.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any

person obtaining a copy of this software and associated

documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the

Software without restriction, including without limitation

the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,

distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the

Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is

furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice

shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of

the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT

WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES

OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT

SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE

LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER

LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,

TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN

CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR

OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

En 1

About The Independent JPEG

Group's JPEG software

The Independent JPEG Group's JPEG software

Vollbeding.

The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation,

either express or implied, with respect to this software,

its quality, accuracy, merchantability, or fitness for a

particular purpose. This software is provided "AS IS',

and you, its user, assume the entire risk as to its quality

and accuracy.

Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and

distribute this software (or portions thereof) for any

purpose, without fee, subject to these conditions:

(1) If any part of the source code for this software is

distributed, then this README file must be

included, with this copyright and no-warranty notice

unaltered; and any additions, deletions, or changes

to the original files must be clearly indicated in

accompanying documentation.

(2) If only executable code is distributed, then the

accompanying documentation must state that "this

software is based in part on the work of the

Independent JPEG Group".

(3) Permission for use of this software is granted only if

the user accepts full responsibility for any

undesirable consequences; the authors accept NO

LIABILITY for damages of any kind.

These conditions apply to any software derived from or

based on the IJG code, not just to the unmodified

library. If you use our work, you ought to acknowledge

US.

Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG

author's name or company name in advertising or

publicity relating to this software or products derived

from it. This software may be referred to only as "the

Independent JPEG Group's software".

We specifically permit and encourage the use of this

software as the basis of commercial products, provided

that all warranty or liability claims are assumed by the

product vendor.

About JsonCpp

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any

person obtaining a copy of this software and associated

documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the

Software without restriction, including without limitation

the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,

distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the

Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is

furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice

shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of

the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT

WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES

OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT

SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE

LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER

LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,

TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN

CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR

OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

About Network

The Regents of the University of California. All rights

reserved.

The Regents of the University of California. All rights

reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with

or without modification, are permitted provided that the

following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above

following disclaimer.

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the

above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the

following disclaimer in the documentation and/or

other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of

this software must display the following

acknowledgement:

This product includes software developed by the

University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.

Neither the name of the University nor the names of

its contributors may be used to endorse or promote

products derived from this software without specific

prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS

AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

En 2

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO

EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE

LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,

SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR

SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR

BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND

ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN

CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING

NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY

OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

California.

of California.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are

permitted provided that the above copyright notice and

this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that

any documentation, advertising materials, and other

materials related to such distribution and use

acknowledge that the software was developed by the

University of California, Berkeley. The name of the

University may not be used to endorse or promote

products derived from this software without specific

prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND WITHOUT

ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS

FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

About PNG Reference Library

ibpng versions 1.2.6, August 15, 2004, through 1.4.5,

Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according

to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-1.2.5 with

the following individual added to the list of Contributing

Authors

Cosmin Truta

libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.2.5 -

Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the

same disclaimer and license as libpng-1.0.6 with the

following individuals added to the list of Contributing

Authors

Simon-Pierre Cadieux

Eric S. Raymond

Gilles Vollant

and with the following additions to the disclaimer:

There is no warranty against interference with your

enjoyment of the library or against infringement.

There is no warranty that our efforts or the library will

fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs. This

library is provided with all faults, and the entire risk

of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and

effort is with the user.

libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6,

Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the

same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.96, with the

following individuals added to the list of Contributing

Authors:

Tom Lane

Glenn Randers-Pehrson

Willem van Schaik

libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May

Distributed according to the same disclaimer and

license as libpng-0.88, with the following individuals

added to the list of Contributing Authors:

John Bowler

Kevin Bracey

Sam Bushell

Magnus Holmgren

Greg Roelofs

Tom Tanner

libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January

Group 42, Inc.

For the purposes of this copyright and license,

"Contributing Authors" is defined as the following set of

individuals:

Andreas Dilger

Dave Martindale

Guy Eric Schalnat

Paul Schmidt

Tim Wegner

The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS". The

Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all

warranties, expressed or implied, including, without

limitation, the warranties of merchantability and of

fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors and

Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct, indirect,

incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential

damages, which may result from the use of the PNG

Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of

such damage.

Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and

distribute this source code, or portions hereof, for any

purpose, without fee, subject to the following

restrictions:

1. The origin of this source code must not be

misrepresented.

2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and

must not be misrepresented as being the original

source.

En 3

3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or altered

from any source or altered source distribution.

The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.

specifically permit, without fee, and encourage the use

of this source code as a component to supporting the

PNG file format in commercial products. If you use this

source code in a product, acknowledgment is not

required but would be appreciated.

About RC4 Algorithm

Reserved.

Proprietary and Confidential Material.

About WPA Supplicant

contributors

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with

or without modification, are permitted provided that the

following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above

following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the

above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the

following disclaimer in the documentation and/or

other materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name(s) of the above-listed copyright

holder(s) nor the names of its contributors may be

used to endorse or promote products derived from

this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT

HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,

BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO

EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR

CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,

INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE

GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR

PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER

CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,

WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT

(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING

IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,

EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH

DAMAGE.

About zlib Library

This software is provided 'as-is _,without any express or

implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held

liable for any damages arising from the use of this

software.

Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for

any purpose, including commercial applications, and to

alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following

restrictions:

1. The origin of this software must not be

misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote

the original software. If you use this software in a

product, an acknowledgment in the product

documentation would be appreciated but is not

required.

2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as

such, and must not be misrepresented as being the

original software.

3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any

source distribution.

Do not disassemble, decompile, or reverse engineer

the software included in Yamaha AV products.

YAMAHA CORPORATION

OYAMAHA

FCC iNFORMATiON (forUS customers)

1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT. v

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets

FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your

authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.

2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only

high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all

installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to

use this product in the USA.

3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in

FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class "B" digital devices. Compliance with these requirements

provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and. if not installed and used according to

the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of

other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all

installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by

turning the unit "OFF" and "ON". please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the

following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch _circuit breaker or fuse bcircuits or install AC

line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300

ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer

authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please

contact Yamaha Corporation of America A/V Division, USA. 6600 Orangethorpe Ave.. Buena

Park. CA 90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of

America or its subsidiaries.

COMPLIANCE iNFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)

Responsible Party: Yamaha Corporation of America A/V Division

Address: 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue Buena Park, CA 90620

Telephone: 714-522-9011

Type of Equipment: AV Receiver

Model Name: RX-A3030/RX-A2030/RX-A 1030/RX-A830/RX-A730/

RX-V3075/RX-V2075/RX-V 1075/RX-V775/RX-V675/RX-V575/RX-V475/

HTR-6066/HTR-5066/HTR-4066/TSR-6750

* This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

* Operation is subject to the following conditions:

- This device may not cause harmful interference.

-This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause

undesired operation.

See the Troubleshooting section at the end of the Owner's Manual on the supplied CD-ROM if

interference to radio reception is suspected.

iNFORMATiONDELAFCC(pourlesclientsr sidant auxl tats-Unis)

1 AVIS IMPORTANT : NE PAS APPORTER DE MODIFICATIONS A CET APPAREIL !

Cet appareil est conforme aux exigences de la FCC s'il est install6 selon les instructions du

mode d'emploL Toute modification non approuv_e express6ment par Yamaha peut invalider

l'autorisation de la FCC d'ufiliser cet appareil.

2 IMPORTANT : N'utiliser que des cables blind,s de haute qualit6 pour le raccordement de

cet apparel! h des accessoires et/ou _tun autre appareil. Seuls le ou les cables fburnis avec le

produit DOIVENT _tre ufilisds. Suivre les instructions concernant l'installation. Le non

respect des instructions peut invalider l'autorisation, accordde par la FCC, d'utiliser ce

produit aux ]_tats-Unis.

3 REMARQUE : Cet appareil a 6t6 test6 et d6clar6 conforme au× n0rmes relatives aux

appareils num6fiques de Classe <<B _, telles que fix6es dans !'Article 15 de la R6glementation

FCC: Ces normes sont destinies _ assurer une protection suffisante contre les interf6rences

nuisibles avec d'autres appareils 61ectroniques darts une installation r6sidentielle.

Cet 6quipement gdnEre et utilise des fr6quences radio qui, en cas d'installation et d' utilisation

non conformes aux instructions du mode d'emploi, peuvent etre _tl'origine d'interf6rences

empechant d'autres appareils de fonctionner.

Cependant, la conformit6 _ la R6glementation FCC ne garantit pas l'absence d'interf6rences

dans une installation particuliEre. Sieet appareil devait produire des interf&ences, ce qui peul

etre d6termin6 en <_t_TEIGNANT >_,puis en <_RALLUMANT r> l'appareil, l'utilisateur est invit6

essayer de corriger le probl_me d'une des mani_res suivantes :

Rdorienter cet appareil ou le dispositif affect_ par les interf6rences.

Utiliser des prises d'alimentation branch_es sur cliff, rents circuits (avec interrupteur de circuit ou

fusible) ou installer un ou des filtres pour ligne secteur.

Dans le cas d'interf6rences radio ou TV, changer de place l'antenne et la r6orientero Si l'antenne

est un conducteur plat de 300 ohms, remplacer ce cable par un cable de type coaxial.

Si ces mesures ne donnent pas les r6sultats escompt6s, pribre de contacter le ddtaillant local

autoris6 _ commercialiser ce type d'appareil. Si ce n'est pas possible, pfibre de contacter Yamaha

Corporation of America A/V Division, ]_tats-Unis, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, CA

90620.

Les d6clarations pr6c6dentes concernent EXCLUSIVEMENT les appareils commercialis_s par

Yamaha Corporation of America ou ses filiales.

Pattie responsable:

Addresse:

T616phone:

Type d'6quipement:

Nora de modEle:

DC:CLARATiON SUR LES INFORMATIONS DE CONFORIVRTE

(PROCEDURE DE DECLARATION DE CONFORMITI_)

Yamaha Corporation of America A/V Division

6600 Orangethorpe Avenue Buena Park. CA 90620

714-522-9011

Ampli-tuner audio-video

RX-A3030/RX-A2030/RX-A 1030/RX-A830/RX-A7301

RX-V3075/RX-V2075/RX-V 1075/RX-V775/RX-V675/RX-V5751

RX-V4751

HTR-6066/HTR-5066/HTR-4066/TSR-6750

. Cet appareil est conforme _ l'article 15 de la r_glementation FCC.

. Le fonctionnement est soumis aux conditions suivantes:

- Cet appareil ne peut pas causer d'interf(rences nuisibles.

- Cet appareil doit recevoir routes les interferences, y compns celles pouvant entra_ner des probl_mes de

fonctionnement.

Voyez la section Guide de d_pannage h la fin de ce mode d'emploi si vous pensez que le probl_me

de r_ception radio est dfi h des interferences.

YAMAHA CORPORATION

Printed in Malaysia ZF49340

OYAMAHA

AV Receiver

Safety Brochure

O (Power key)

Turns on the power of this unit or sets it to the standby mode.

For more detailed information, refer to the Owner's Manual on the CD-ROM. To view the

Owner's Manual, click on "English" in the screen displayed automatically when you insert the

CD-ROM into your PC, or click on the model name if the screen to select models is displayed,

and then click on "English" in the next screen. Then, follow the onscreen instructions.

If the screen is not displayed automatically, open the "index.htm!" in the CD-ROM.

Caution: Do not attempt to play this CD-ROM in an audio player.

The Owner's Manual contained in the CD-ROM can be downloaded from the following website.

http://download.yamaha.com!

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RiSK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS iNSiDE. REFER SERViCiNG TO

QUALiFiED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is

intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the

product' s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of

electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the

presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the

literature accompanying the appliance.

1 Read these instructions.

2 Keep these instructions.

3 Heed all warnings.

4 Follow all instructions.

5 Do not use this apparatus near water.

6 Clean only with dry cloth.

Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus

(including amplifiers) that produce heat.

Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has

two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third

grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the

provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the

obsolete outlet.

Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience

receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.

Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.

Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the

manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when

moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.

Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods

of time.

Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has

been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been

spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or

moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association's Consumer Electronics Group

want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One

that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or

distortion - and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since

hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha

and the Electronic Industries Association's Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to

avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

LlffI'mC!NG

I OR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS

Pour 6viter les chocs 6lectriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne

correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu'au fond. Cet appareil num6rique de la classe Best

conforme _ la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

B For U.K. customers

If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug supplied with this appliance, it should

be cut off and an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described below.

The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is

hazardous if engaged in a live socket oufleto

m Special instructions for U,K, ModeJ

iMPORTANT

THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE

FOLLOWING CODE:

Blue: NEUTRAL

Brown: LIVE ' "

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the

coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the

letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the

terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug.

2 En

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place - away from direct sunlight, heat

sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and!or cold. For proper ventilation, allow the following minimum

clearances.

Top: 30 cm, Rear: 20 cm, Sides: 20 cm

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in

an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this

unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed

to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:

- Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit.

- Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

- Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user

and/or damage to this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation.

If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wa!l outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is

dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not be held

responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cable and outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall

outlet or this unit during a lightning storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified Yamaha service personnel when any

service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for tong periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power

plug from the wall outlet.

16 Be sure to refer to the "Troubleshooting" section of the Owner's Manual on the CD-ROM for

common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.

17 Before moving this unit, press 0.)to set it to standby mode and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet.

18 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (General model)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage

BEFORE plugging into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are:

........................................................................................................... AC 110-1201220-240V, 50/60Hz

19 Condensation will form when the surrounding temperature changes suddenly. Disconnect the power

cable from the outlet, then leave this unit alone.

20 When using this unit for a long time, this unit may become warm. Turn the power off, then leave this

unit alone for cooling.

21 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily.

22 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like. When you

dispose of batteries, follow your regional regulations.

23 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss.

24 When replacing the batteries, be sure to use batteries of the same type. Danger of explosion may

happen if batteries are incorrectly replaced.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall

outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off by _. This state is called the standby mode. In this

state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power.

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT

TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

m Notes on remote controls and batteries

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

. Do not leave or store the remote control in the following conditions:

- places of high humidity, such as near a bath

- places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove

- places of extremely low temperatures

- dusty places

• Insert the battery according to the polarity markings (+ and -).

• Change all batteries if you notice the following conditions:

- the operation range of the remote control narrows

- the transmit indicator does not flash or is dim

- If the batteries run out, immediately remove them from the remote control to prevent an explosion or

acid leak.

• ff you find leaking batteries, discard the batteries immediately, taking care not to touch the leaked

material. If the leaked material comes into contact with your skin or gets into your eyes or mouth, rinse

it away immediately and consult a doctor. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing

new batteries.

• Do not use old batteries together with new ones. This may shorten the life of the new batteries or cause

old batteries to leak.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Specification

of batteries may be different even though they look the same.

• Before inserting new batteries, wipe the compartment clean.

. If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. In such a case, install new batteries and set

the remote control code.

• Dispose of batteries according to your regional regulations.

, Keep batteries away from children. If a battery is accidentally swallowed, contact your doctor

immediately.

• When not planning to use the remote control for long periods of time, remove the batteries from the

remote control.

• Do not charge or disassemble the suppliedbatteries.

This label is required to be attached to a product of which the temperature of the top cover may hot during

operation.

3En

information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old

Equipment and Used Batteries

These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean

that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with

general household waste.

For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries,

please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national

legislation and the Directives 2002/96_C and 2006/66_C.

By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save

valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and

the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.

For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries,

please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of

sale where you purchased the items.

[information on Disposal in other Countries outside the

European Union]

These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these

items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method

of disposal.

Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):

This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it

complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved.

AVEG 1A 1102C

important Notice:Guarantee information for customers

in EEA* and Switzerland

For detailed guarantee information about this Yamaha product, and Pan-EEA* and Switzerland

warranty service, please either visit the website address below (Printable file is available at our

website) or contact the Yamaha representative office for your country. *EEA:European

Economic Area

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner's Manual in a safe place

for future reference.

YAMAHA CORPORATION

Printed in Malaysia ZD81440

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de details sur les produits, contactez votre representant Yamaha le plus proche de chez vous ou le distributeur agr66 indiqu6 ci-dessous.

[ NORTH AMERICA ]

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Tronto ON M1S 3Ri, Canada

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

[ CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA ]

MEXICO

Yamaha de M6xico S.A. de C.V.

Avenida Insurgentes n_mero 1647,

Co!. San Jose Insurgentes, C.P. 03900,

Deleg. Bonito Jua.rez, M6xico, D.F.

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Rua Joaquim FIoriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,

CEP 04534-013 Sao Pauto, SR BRAZIL

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Sucursal de Argentina

Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte

Madero Este=C1107CEK

Buenos Aires, Argentina

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES /

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Torre Bunco General, Piso 7, Urbanizaci6n Marbella,

Calla 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panam& Panama

I EUROPE

EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

RUSSIA

Yamaha Music (Russia)

Room 37, bid. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow,

121059, Russia

I AFRICA ]

REPUBLIC OF SOUTH AFRICA

Tuning Fork Pty Ltd T/A Balanced Audio

19 Eastern Service Road, Eastgate, Sandton,

Gauteng, 2054,South Africa

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, dubel Ali, Dubai,

United Arab Emirates

As of September 2012

AVRO1201A

1ZF733!0 ]

Yamaha Corporation, AV Products Division

Nakazawa-cho 10=1,Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

¥ 430-8650 _".#._2_[Zq_jR_ 10-1

[ MIDDLE EAST I

TURKEY / CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstrasse 22=34, 25462 Reilingen, Germany

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel All,

Dubai, United Arab Emirates

[ ASiA ]

THE PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.

2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,

Shanghai, China

iNDiA

Yamaha Music india Pvt. Ltd.

Spazedge building, Ground Floor, Tower A, Sector

47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon, Haryana, india

iNDONESiA

PT. Yamaha Muaik indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

REPUBLIC OF KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,

Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Seianger, Malaysia

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music (Asia) PRIVATE LiMiTED

BIk 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00,

Singapore 530202, Singapore

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co. Ltd.

4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building,

891/t Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,

Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia=Pacific Sales & Marketing Group .

Nakazawa-cho 10=1, Naka=ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

L OCEANIA I

AUSTRALIA / NEW ZEALAND

Yamaha Music Australia Pry. Ltd.

Level 1,99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Regi

Your

Thank you for purchasing a new product from Yamaha Electronics. We would like to continue

providing you with high quality products and better service. Please take a few minutes to visit our

website and complete the product registration process at www.yamaha.comlYEOlregistrationl

Yamaha is committed to doing it's par[ in protecting the environment and reducing the impact

on our natural resources. As a result, this product is supplied with an electronic copy of the

manual on the enclosed disc for use on your computer.

We appreciate your business and look forward to hearing from you soon.

Product registration applies to USA customers onlyo

Failure to complete the registration form does not diminish your warranty rights in any way.

ZC64070

@YAMAHA

LiMiTED WARRANTY ON

HOME AUDIO PRODUCTS

Thank you for selecting a YAMAHA product. YAMAHA products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free performance. Yamaha

Corporation of America ("YAMAHA") is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and every YAMAHA product. YAMAHA sells its

products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer you, the Original Owner, the foflowing Limited Warranty, which

appfles only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from YAMAHA's authorized dealers in the USA, including Puerto Rico (the "Warranted Area")

and (2) used exclusively in the Warranted Area. YAMAHA suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized

YAMAHA dealer or YAMAHA Customer Service if you have any questions.

THiS WARRANTY COVERS THE LISTED PRODUCTS AGAINST DEFECTS iN MATERIALS OR

WORKMANSHIP FOR THE NUMBER OF YEARS iDENTiFiED BELOW.

Warranty Term

Type of Product

A/V and Stereo Receivers, Processor and Integrated Amplifiers,

Separate Amplifiers and Preamplifiers, Tuners, CD Players and

Changers, HDD Players and Recorders, Network Players, Powered

Loudspeakers, Media Controllers and Speaker Systems purchased

individually, as a pair, or as part of an integrated or Packaged System.

Duration of Warranty from Date of

Purchase by or for the Original Owner

........................ 2 years

Cassette Decks, Blu-ray Disc Players, DVD Players and Changers,

integrated Systems (Receiver or Amplifier combined or on same

chassis with CD, DVD or Blu-ray Disc Player), DeeMop Audio Systems

(i.e. TSX and PDX Series), Multimedia Speakers, Headphones,

Earphones and Accessories.

........................ 1 year

Coverage: YAMAHA will, at its option, repair or reptace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or otherwise fails to

conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor or materials. Repairs may be

performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed YAMAHA specifications for new parts, if YAMAHA elects to replace the product, the

replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any instaflation or removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the

product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, YAMAHA will pay the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs

are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not cover (a) damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse,

improper installation or operation or failure to follow instructions according to the Owner's Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims

must be presented to the carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than YAMAHA or an authorized YAMAHA Service Center; (b) any unit which

has been altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear, battery or battery replacement and any periodic

maintenance; (d) deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature or humidity; (e)

damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; (f) RFI/EMI (Interference/noise) caused by

improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if applicable; or (g) interference arising from the use of wireless

communication devices (e.g. 2.4 gHz cordless telephones), or other radio frequency emitting products such as microwave ovens, whether such

interference impairs the operation of the product or vice-versa. Consult the Owner's Manual for guidance on set-up procedures for minimizing the risks of

interference. Any evidence of alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This warranty covers only

the Original Owner and is not transferable.

in Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service wilt only be provided for defective products within the Warranted Area. Contact your

local authorized YAMAHA dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful, contact YAMAHA at the address,

telephone number or website shown below. YAMAHA may request that you send the defective product to a local authorized YAMAHA Servicer or

authorize return of the defective product to YAMAHA for repair. For products requiring in-home service, contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer to

arrange for service. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer has been authorized by YAMAHA, please contact YAMAHA's Service Department at the

number shown below, or check Yamaha's website at http://usa.yamaha.com. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be

accompanied by a detailed explanation of the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or other

dated, proof-of-purchase document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted for warranty service be

found ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair wil] be accomplished only if requested by you and upon receipt of

payment or acceptable arrangement for payment.

Limitation of implied Warranties and E×clusion of Damages: ANYiMPLIEDWARRANTIES,INCLUDINGWARRANTIESOF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TtME SET

FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON

INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER EQUIPMENT OR OTHER iTEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF

PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES. YAMAHA'S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LiMiTED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT

OF THE PRODUCT, AT YAMAHA'S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR

THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF iNCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT

APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. This is the only express

warranty applicable to the product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to assume for it any other express warranty.

if you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized YAMAHA Servicer, please contact:

OYAMAHA

CUSTOMER SERVICE

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373

Telephone: 800-292-2982

http://usa,yamaha.com

Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by YAMAHA.

Yamaha RX-V675 7.2 Channel Network AV Receiver with Airplay

Product's Documents

Owner's Manual

Specifications

Yamaha RX-V675 Questions and Answers

#1 Can I plug a hard drive to the USB connector and play movies?

#2 Will this unit allow pass-through of video through the HDMI with out turning the unit on?

#3 Have 8 built in speakers. Can I connect all 8 to this receiver?

#4 I intend to use the 675 as a 5.1 type. Would there be any problems with that? I know the receiver seems to be aware of how it's being wired up.